1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 1
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_style english
138 \paperpagestyle default
139 \tracking_changes true
140 \output_changes false
144 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
145 \author 274215730 "scott"
146 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
157 by the \SpecialChar LyX
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
166 Documentation mailing list:
167 \begin_inset CommandInset href
169 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Note Note
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
192 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
193 \begin_inset Newline newline
198 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
199 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
207 \begin_layout Standard
208 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
209 LatexCommand tableofcontents
216 \begin_layout Chapter
220 \begin_layout Section
221 What is \SpecialChar LyX
225 \begin_layout Standard
227 is a document preparation system.
228 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
229 scripts, publishable books, business
230 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
231 It is unlike most other
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
239 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
241 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 pt type, left justified, 5
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
267 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
271 \begin_layout Standard
272 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
277 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
281 \begin_layout Standard
286 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
287 's philosophy: most importantly,
288 the format of all of the manuals.
289 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
290 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
296 manual describes that, too.
299 \begin_layout Section
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
306 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
308 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
309 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
313 \begin_layout Standard
314 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
315 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
316 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
318 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
319 only a vertical scrollbar.
320 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
321 The first case is large images.
322 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
323 image and use the option
334 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
337 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
338 this doesn't work for equations yet.
341 \begin_layout Standard
342 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
343 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
351 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
358 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
365 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
367 Just select the manual you want to read from the
374 \begin_layout Section
375 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
379 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
386 \begin_layout Standard
387 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
388 can be configured via the menu
390 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
394 \begin_inset Index idx
397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
404 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
406 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 packages are available.
408 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
410 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
412 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
417 \begin_inset space \space{}
420 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
423 To force \SpecialChar LyX
424 to re-inspect your system, you should use
426 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
430 \begin_inset Index idx
433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
434 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
440 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
441 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
444 \begin_layout Section
447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
449 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
456 \begin_layout Standard
457 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
458 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
459 installed, but you will not be
460 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
461 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
462 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
463 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
464 document can always be output as plain text
468 \begin_layout Standard
469 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
470 or DocBook classes or packages.
471 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
472 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
475 \begin_layout Standard
476 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
477 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
478 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
481 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
489 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
490 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
497 \begin_inset Index idx
500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
501 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
509 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 \begin_layout Chapter
521 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
525 \begin_layout Section
526 Basic File Operations
527 \begin_inset Index idx
530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
539 \begin_layout Standard
544 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
545 in addition to some more advanced operations:
548 \begin_layout Itemize
570 \begin_layout Itemize
586 arg "buffer-new-template"
592 \begin_layout Itemize
614 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \begin_layout Itemize
660 \begin_layout Itemize
672 arg "buffer-write-as"
678 \begin_layout Itemize
692 \begin_layout Itemize
706 \begin_layout Standard
707 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
708 a few minor differences.
711 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
722 command lists the available templates.
723 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
724 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
725 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
733 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
773 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
774 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
775 is just that — a big, blank space.
783 \begin_layout Standard
804 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
809 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
812 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
830 will reload the document from disk.
831 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
832 and want to restore it to the last save.
841 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
842 them as your changes.
845 \begin_layout Section
846 Basic Editing Features
847 \begin_inset Index idx
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
859 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
868 can perform cut and paste operations
869 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
870 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
871 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
872 editing features and how to access
874 We will start with cut and paste.
877 \begin_layout Standard
878 As you might expect, the
882 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
883 various other editing features.
884 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
888 \begin_layout Itemize
894 \begin_inset Index idx
897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
926 \begin_layout Itemize
932 \begin_inset Index idx
935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
964 \begin_layout Itemize
970 \begin_inset Index idx
973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1002 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset space ~
1018 \begin_layout Itemize
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset Index idx
1035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset Index idx
1047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1062 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1072 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1078 \begin_layout Standard
1079 The first three are self-explanatory.
1080 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1081 and other programs by
1102 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1103 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1108 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1109 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1110 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1111 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1112 into individual cells.
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1121 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1122 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1126 \begin_layout Standard
1130 \begin_inset space ~
1135 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1137 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1139 \begin_inset space ~
1146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1152 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1153 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1154 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1160 \begin_inset space \space{}
1163 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1164 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1170 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1180 \begin_inset space ~
1189 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1190 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1192 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1201 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1202 start a new paragraph.
1203 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1204 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1229 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1232 paste from the primary selection.
1233 This is normally the currently selected text.
1236 \begin_layout Standard
1239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1269 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1272 \begin_inset space ~
1281 \begin_inset space ~
1286 button to skip the current word.
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1295 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1304 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1306 If the toggle is set, searching for
1307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1318 will not match the word
1319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1333 Match whole words only
1335 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1336 to only find complete words, e.
1337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1366 offers also an advanced
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1378 feature that is described in section
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1385 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1394 \begin_inset space \space{}
1398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1408 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1413 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1420 \begin_layout Standard
1424 arg "inset-select-all"
1427 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1428 When the cursor is inside an inset
1431 arg "inset-select-all"
1434 selects the content of the inset.
1438 arg "inset-select-all"
1441 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1446 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1449 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1453 \begin_layout Section
1455 \begin_inset Index idx
1458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1465 \begin_inset Index idx
1468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1477 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1484 \begin_layout Standard
1485 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1487 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1493 or the toolbar button
1499 to undo some mistake.
1500 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1502 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1505 or the toolbar button
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1523 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1536 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1537 This is a consequence of the 100
1538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 step undo limit mentioned above.
1544 \begin_layout Standard
1553 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1555 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1559 \begin_layout Section
1561 \begin_inset Index idx
1564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1573 \begin_layout Standard
1574 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1577 \begin_layout Enumerate
1582 \begin_layout Itemize
1587 once anywhere in the edit window.
1588 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1592 \begin_layout Enumerate
1597 \begin_layout Itemize
1604 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1610 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1611 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1614 \begin_layout Itemize
1615 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1625 \begin_layout Enumerate
1626 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1630 \begin_layout Standard
1631 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1632 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1636 \begin_layout Section
1638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1640 name "sec:Navigating"
1645 \begin_inset Index idx
1648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1657 \begin_layout Standard
1659 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1732 \begin_layout Subsection
1734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1736 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1741 \begin_inset Index idx
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 Navigating ! Outline
1751 \begin_inset Index idx
1754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1763 \begin_layout Standard
1764 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1765 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1766 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1768 \begin_inset space ~
1772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1774 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1778 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1785 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1790 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1794 \begin_layout Standard
1795 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1796 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1797 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1798 dialog and to modify the citation.
1801 \begin_layout Standard
1802 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1804 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1805 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1813 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1818 you further to control the display.
1823 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1824 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1830 option keeps it in the current view state.
1831 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 3, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1848 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1853 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1863 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1866 \begin_layout Standard
1873 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1874 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1889 So, for example, you can move section
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1897 2.4 or after section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1903 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1916 (or the corresponding key bindings
1924 ) you can change the level of sections.
1925 So you can for example make section
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1941 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1942 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1945 \begin_layout Subsection
1946 Horizontal Scrolling
1947 \begin_inset Index idx
1950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_layout Standard
1961 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1967 \begin_inset space \space{}
1971 \begin_inset space ~
1974 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1975 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1976 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1985 \begin_layout Itemize
1987 is used on a small tablet computer
1990 \begin_layout Itemize
1991 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_inset space ~
2016 \begin_layout Itemize
2017 Math constructs with long command names
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2021 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2022 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2024 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2025 windows so that table
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2032 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2037 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2039 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2040 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2043 \begin_layout Standard
2044 \begin_inset Float table
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2056 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2060 Horizontal scrolling test.
2068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2070 \begin_inset Tabular
2071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2117 \begin_layout Section
2118 Input/Word Completion
2119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2121 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Standard
2172 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2174 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2175 is used to propose completions.
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2179 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2187 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2213 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2223 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2224 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2225 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2226 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2229 \begin_layout Standard
2231 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2232 completions available.
2237 key to accept a proposed completion.
2238 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2239 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2240 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2248 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2249 ing options for text.
2250 The special math option
2254 enables characters to be composed.
2255 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2256 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2259 , you can then input the characters
2260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2271 to a formula to get it.
2272 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2273 of the math toolbar.
2274 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2278 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2279 's installation folder.
2280 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2289 \begin_layout Section
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2333 \begin_inset Index idx
2336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2367 \begin_layout Standard
2368 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2382 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2385 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2389 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2390 \begin_inset space ~
2394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2396 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2407 \begin_inset space ~
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2436 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2440 \begin_layout Labeling
2441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2445 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2446 LatexCommand nomenclature
2448 description "Tabulator key"
2454 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2456 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2457 \begin_inset space ~
2461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2463 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2470 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2474 , especially section
2475 \begin_inset space ~
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "subsec:Lists"
2487 If you are still confused, look in the
2492 \begin_inset Newline newline
2500 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2501 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2505 \begin_layout Labeling
2506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2510 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2511 LatexCommand nomenclature
2513 description "Escape key"
2520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2527 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2528 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2531 \begin_layout Labeling
2532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2549 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2550 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2554 \begin_layout Standard
2555 There are three modifier keys:
2558 \begin_layout Labeling
2559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2577 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2578 LatexCommand nomenclature
2580 description "Control key"
2584 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2585 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2589 \begin_layout Itemize
2598 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2626 \begin_layout Labeling
2627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2645 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2646 LatexCommand nomenclature
2648 description "Shift key"
2652 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2653 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2656 \begin_layout Labeling
2657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2675 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2676 LatexCommand nomenclature
2678 description "Alt or Meta key"
2682 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2683 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2684 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2690 \begin_inset Newline newline
2693 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2695 menu accelerator keys
2698 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2699 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 For example, the sequence
2705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2715 \begin_inset space ~
2721 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2748 \begin_inset space ~
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2764 \begin_layout Standard
2769 manual lists all other things bound to the
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2778 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2780 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2781 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2782 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2783 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2784 The \SpecialChar LyX
2785 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2786 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2787 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2789 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2805 followed by a capital
2812 \begin_layout Chapter
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2828 \begin_layout Section
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Subsection
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2847 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2848 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2849 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2850 numbering schemes, and so on.
2851 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2852 and format the title of your document differently.
2855 \begin_layout Standard
2860 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2861 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2862 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2863 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2864 picks one for you by default.
2865 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2868 \begin_layout Subsection
2870 \begin_inset Index idx
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2882 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2889 \begin_layout Standard
2890 You can select a class using the
2892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2907 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2916 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Article for basic articles
2925 \begin_layout Description
2926 Report for basic reports
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Book for writing a book
2933 \begin_layout Description
2934 Letter for US-style letters
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2939 only uses if you have installed
2940 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2941 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2942 distributions will include
2944 Here are some of the classes.
2945 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2947 Special Document Classes
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2972 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2973 There are three article layouts available.
2974 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2975 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2976 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2977 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2982 sequential numbering
2983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2986 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2987 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2988 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2989 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2992 \begin_layout Description
2993 Beamer Layout for presentations
2996 \begin_layout Description
2997 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2998 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2999 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3000 with \SpecialChar LyX
3004 \begin_layout Description
3005 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3008 \begin_layout Description
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3013 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3016 \begin_layout Description
3017 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Foils Used to make transparencies
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3026 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3027 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3028 with \SpecialChar LyX
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3034 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3047 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3048 (Is used by this document.)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3059 \begin_layout Description
3064 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3065 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3067 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Slides Used to make transparencies
3075 \begin_layout Description
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3080 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3081 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3088 \begin_layout Standard
3089 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3091 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3093 Special Document Classes
3100 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3101 of the document classes.
3104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3114 \begin_inset Index idx
3117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3135 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3137 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3140 \begin_layout Standard
3143 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3148 , are highly specialized.
3150 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3151 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3152 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3153 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3154 by some document class.
3155 There are just too many of them.
3156 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3159 \begin_layout Standard
3160 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3168 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3169 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3170 document class for a new file.
3172 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3175 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 manual for information on how to install them.
3183 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3189 \begin_layout Standard
3190 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3191 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3192 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3193 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3194 class files to be used for dissertation
3195 s submitted to those universities.
3196 The \SpecialChar LyX
3197 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3199 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3203 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3209 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3216 name "subsec:Modules"
3221 \begin_inset Index idx
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 \begin_layout Standard
3234 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3235 chosen document class.
3236 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3237 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3248 \begin_inset Index idx
3251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3258 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 packages or file format converters that are not always
3265 installed by default.
3267 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3268 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3269 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3270 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3272 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3273 file without the missing prerequisites.
3274 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3275 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3282 \begin_inset Index idx
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3286 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3292 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3297 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3300 \begin_layout Standard
3301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3311 will advise you about these things.
3319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3323 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3328 \begin_inset Index idx
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3332 Document ! Local Layout
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3341 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3342 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3343 : They are intended to be used in
3344 a variety of different documents.
3345 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3346 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3347 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3348 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3349 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 manual for information on how to use it.
3372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3377 Each class has a default set of options.
3378 Here's a quick table describing them:
3381 \begin_layout Standard
3382 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3390 \begin_inset Tabular
3391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3392 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3851 \begin_layout Standard
3852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 You're probably also wondering what
3860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3864 \begin_inset space ~
3868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3872 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3873 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3878 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3883 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3893 headings, there are also
3901 headings, and so on.
3902 We will describe these headings fully in section
3903 \begin_inset space ~
3907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3909 reference "subsec:Headings"
3916 \begin_layout Subsection
3918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3920 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Standard
3948 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3965 \begin_inset space ~
3970 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3972 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3973 doesn't support special options you want to
3974 use for your document.
3975 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3976 -class and its options, you have to read
3980 \begin_layout Standard
3984 \begin_inset space ~
3991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4003 You can choose between the following five options:
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 Use default page style of current class.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4021 No page numbers or headings.
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 \begin_layout Labeling
4034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4039 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4040 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4041 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4042 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4051 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4052 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4058 \begin_inset Index idx
4061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4063 -packages ! fancyhdr
4069 How they are defined is explained in section
4070 \begin_inset space ~
4074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4076 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4083 \begin_layout Standard
4084 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4098 \begin_layout Subsection
4099 Paper Size and Orientation
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 Document ! Paper size
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4112 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4119 \begin_layout Standard
4120 You can find the following options in the menu
4123 \begin_inset space ~
4130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset Index idx
4137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4146 \begin_layout Labeling
4147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4151 \begin_inset space ~
4156 What size paper to print on.
4161 \begin_layout Itemize
4167 \begin_layout Itemize
4173 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 \begin_layout Itemize
4185 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 US letter, US legal, US executive
4191 \begin_layout Itemize
4197 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 \begin_layout Labeling
4205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4210 To choose whether to output as
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 \begin_inset space ~
4231 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4232 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4235 \begin_layout Subsection
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4239 name "subsec:Margins"
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4254 \begin_inset Index idx
4257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 Paper margins are set in the menu
4269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset Index idx
4276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4287 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4288 the paper format and the font size into account.
4291 \begin_layout Subsection
4295 \begin_layout Standard
4296 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4302 That includes the paragraph environments.
4303 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4304 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4305 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4307 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4316 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4318 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4319 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4320 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4323 \begin_layout Section
4324 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4325 \begin_inset Index idx
4328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4329 Paragraph ! Indentation
4337 \begin_layout Subsection
4339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4341 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4348 \begin_layout Standard
4349 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4350 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4353 \begin_layout Standard
4354 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4355 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4356 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4357 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4361 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4367 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4368 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4369 language than English.
4371 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4376 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4377 into \SpecialChar LyX
4379 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4382 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4384 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4385 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4386 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4394 goes to produce a printable file.
4399 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4401 gives you the ability globally to change
4405 these pre-coded spacings.
4406 We will explain more later.
4409 \begin_layout Subsection
4410 Paragraph Separation
4411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4413 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4418 \begin_inset Index idx
4421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4422 Paragraph ! Separation
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4438 \begin_inset space ~
4446 \begin_inset space ~
4453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4457 \begin_inset Index idx
4460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4469 \begin_layout Subsection
4473 \begin_layout Standard
4474 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset space ~
4484 dialog and toggle the
4487 \begin_inset space ~
4492 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4495 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4499 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4500 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4506 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4509 \begin_layout Subsection
4511 \begin_inset Index idx
4514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4515 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4542 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4562 \begin_inset Index idx
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 -packages ! setspace
4572 installed to use this feature.
4577 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4587 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4590 \begin_layout Section
4591 Paragraph Environments
4592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4594 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph ! Environments
4609 \begin_inset Index idx
4612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4613 Paragraph environments|(
4621 \begin_layout Subsection
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4626 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4629 \begin_layout Standard
4638 } \SpecialChar ldots
4648 \begin_inset Newline newline
4651 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4653 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4654 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4655 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4664 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 A paragraph environment is simply a
4669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4676 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4677 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4678 scheme, labels, and so on.
4679 Additionally, you can
4680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4687 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4688 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4689 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4690 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4692 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4694 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4697 \begin_layout Standard
4698 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4699 \begin_inset Graphics
4700 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4706 at the left end of the toolbar.
4708 will change the environment of the
4712 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4713 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4714 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4727 create a new paragraph using the
4731 paragraph environment.
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 because if you are in one of these environments:
4743 \begin_layout Itemize
4749 \begin_layout Itemize
4755 \begin_layout Itemize
4761 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4773 \begin_layout Itemize
4779 \begin_layout Itemize
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4787 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4791 , rather than resetting it to
4796 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4797 \begin_inset space ~
4801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4803 reference "sec:Nesting"
4810 \begin_layout Subsection
4814 \begin_layout Standard
4815 The default paragraph environment is
4820 It creates a plain paragraph.
4822 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4823 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4824 this manual) are in the
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 You can nest a paragraph using the
4836 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4844 \begin_layout Subsection
4846 \begin_inset Index idx
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4860 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4869 for thanks or contact information.
4870 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4871 places all of this on a separate page
4872 along with today's date.
4873 For other types of documents, the title
4874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4881 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4887 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4901 Here's how you use them:
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4905 Put the title of your document in the
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 Put the author name in the
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4922 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4928 Note that using this environment is optional.
4929 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4930 will automatically insert today's date.
4931 If you don't want a date, use the option
4933 Suppress default date on front page
4937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4940 \begin_inset space ~
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4949 You can use footnotes to insert
4950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4957 or contact information.
4960 \begin_layout Subsection
4962 \begin_inset Index idx
4965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4974 name "subsec:Headings"
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4984 takes care of the numbering for you.
4987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 Section headings ! Numbered
5001 \begin_layout Standard
5002 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5006 \begin_layout Enumerate
5012 \begin_layout Enumerate
5018 \begin_layout Enumerate
5024 \begin_layout Enumerate
5030 \begin_layout Enumerate
5036 \begin_layout Enumerate
5042 \begin_layout Enumerate
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5051 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5052 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5056 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5057 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5058 You group the book into chapters.
5060 does a similar grouping:
5063 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 is divided into either
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5091 \begin_layout Itemize
5103 \begin_layout Itemize
5115 \begin_layout Itemize
5127 \begin_layout Itemize
5139 \begin_layout Standard
5140 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5148 Not all document types use the
5152 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5157 is the top-level heading.
5165 \begin_layout Standard
5170 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5171 labels it with its number,
5172 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5174 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5188 \begin_inset Index idx
5191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5192 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5200 \begin_layout Standard
5201 The unnumbered section headings have a
5202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5209 at the end of their name.
5210 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5211 the table of contents, see section
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5226 Changing the Numbering
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5229 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5236 \begin_layout Standard
5237 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5238 in the Table of Contents.
5239 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5241 Just as certain classes start with
5255 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5265 This is something you can change.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset Index idx
5278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 \begin_inset space ~
5291 \begin_inset space ~
5296 you will see two counters.
5301 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5302 numbers a section heading.
5303 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5308 Short Titles of Headings
5309 \begin_inset Index idx
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5313 Section headings ! Short titles
5319 \begin_inset Argument 1
5322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5331 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5338 \begin_layout Standard
5339 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5340 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5341 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5342 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5347 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5348 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5349 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5350 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5355 \begin_inset space ~
5361 This will insert a box labeled
5362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5366 \begin_inset space ~
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5374 This also works for captions inside floats.
5375 There can only be one short title per title.
5378 \begin_layout Standard
5379 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5386 \begin_layout Standard
5387 The following information applies to all section headings:
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5391 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5394 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5406 \begin_layout Subsection
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5412 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5426 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5427 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5428 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5429 the text they contain.
5430 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5438 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5441 \begin_layout Standard
5442 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5451 when you start a new paragraph.
5452 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5456 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5457 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5458 have to change back to the
5462 environment yourself.
5465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_layout Standard
5487 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5488 time for the differences.
5497 are identical except for one difference:
5501 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5510 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5513 \begin_layout Standard
5514 Here's an example of the
5527 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5529 See – no indentation!
5533 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5534 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5535 the other paragraph.
5538 \begin_layout Standard
5539 Here's another example, this time in the
5546 \begin_layout Quotation
5552 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5553 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5554 the first line, then
5558 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5562 you were quoting other text.
5565 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 Here's a new paragraph.
5567 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5568 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5572 As the examples show,
5576 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5577 They should put quotes in the
5582 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5586 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset Index idx
5604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5620 \begin_layout Standard
5625 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5631 \begin_inset Newline newline
5634 Which I did not rehearse!
5638 It could be much worse.
5639 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5641 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5642 indented a bit more than the first.
5643 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5649 \begin_inset Newline newline
5652 And make things look fine
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5659 arg "newline-insert newline"
5665 \begin_layout Standard
5670 does not indent both margins.
5671 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5672 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Subsection
5683 \begin_inset Index idx
5686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5702 \begin_layout Standard
5704 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5724 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5725 lets you provide your own label.
5726 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5727 describing some general features of all four of them.
5730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5737 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5747 reset the environment to
5751 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5752 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5753 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5761 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5770 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5771 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5773 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5774 you read all of section
5775 \begin_inset space ~
5779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5781 reference "sec:Nesting"
5788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5790 \begin_inset Index idx
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5809 \begin_layout Standard
5810 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5814 paragraph environment.
5815 It has the following properties:
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 The items can have any length.
5836 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5837 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 environment inside another
5853 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5868 \begin_inset space ~
5872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5874 reference "sec:Nesting"
5878 for a full explanation of nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Standard
5883 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5892 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5897 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the first level
5905 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the second level is a dash.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back out to the third level.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 Back to the second level.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 Back to the outermost level.
5938 \begin_layout Standard
5939 These are the default labels for an
5944 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5949 dialog in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset Index idx
5957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5967 \begin_layout Standard
5968 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5969 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5971 \begin_inset space ~
5975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5977 reference "sec:Nesting"
5984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5986 \begin_inset Index idx
5989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5998 name "sec:Enumerate"
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6010 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6011 It has these properties:
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6020 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6026 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 environment resets the counter to one.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6052 Items can have any length.
6055 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6060 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6077 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6079 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6080 labels the four different levels in an
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The first level of an
6092 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the third level
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 Back to the second level.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Back to the outermost level.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6135 environment, see section
6136 \begin_inset space ~
6140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6142 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6147 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 There is more to nesting
6156 environments than we've stated here.
6157 You should read section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "sec:Nesting"
6168 to learn more about nesting.
6171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6173 \begin_inset Index idx
6176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6185 \begin_layout Standard
6186 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6190 list has no fixed label.
6191 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6200 of the first line as the label.
6204 \begin_layout Description
6205 Example: This is an example of the
6212 \begin_layout Standard
6214 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6218 \begin_layout Standard
6220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6227 it is meant that the first usage of the
6231 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6233 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6241 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6255 \begin_inset space ~
6259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6261 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6265 for more information.) Here is an example:
6268 \begin_layout Description
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6273 Example: This one shows how to use a
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6288 \begin_layout Description
6289 Usage: You should use the
6293 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6294 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6296 It's not a good idea to use a
6300 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6301 You're better off using
6313 paragraphs into them.
6316 \begin_layout Description
6317 Nesting: You can nest
6321 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6325 \begin_layout Standard
6326 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6327 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6328 them from the first line.
6331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6333 \begin_inset Index idx
6336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6350 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6351 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6355 \begin_layout Standard
6364 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6366 Here are its properties:
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6372 \begin_inset space ~
6375 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 of each line as the item label.
6389 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6390 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6391 space as described above.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6396 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6397 uses different margins for the item label and the
6398 body of the item text.
6399 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6400 label width plus a little extra space.
6404 \begin_layout Labeling
6405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6407 \begin_inset space ~
6410 width \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6412 If the label width is larger, the label
6413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6420 into the first line.
6421 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6422 margin of the rest of the item text.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6436 environment has the same left margin.
6437 \begin_inset Newline newline
6440 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6450 dialog (toolbar button
6453 arg "layout-paragraph"
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 determines the default label width.
6466 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6475 multiple times instead.
6476 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6486 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6489 \begin_inset space ~
6494 every time you alter a label in a
6499 \begin_inset Newline newline
6502 The predefined default width is the length of
6503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6522 list the same way as the
6526 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6532 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6541 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6542 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6544 \begin_inset space ~
6548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6550 reference "sec:Nesting"
6554 to learn about nesting.
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6558 There is yet another feature of the
6562 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6563 left-justifies the item labels by
6565 You can use additional
6569 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6570 justifies the item label.
6575 are documented in section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6587 Here are some examples:
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 Left The default for
6599 \begin_layout Labeling
6600 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6627 \begin_layout Subsection
6629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6631 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6636 \begin_inset Index idx
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_layout Standard
6649 The features described in this section require that the module
6651 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6653 is loaded in the document settings.
6654 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6660 \begin_inset Index idx
6663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 -packages ! enumitem
6673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 Custom Enumerate Lists
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6679 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6687 \begin_layout Standard
6689 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6695 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6696 There you add the command
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6707 \begin_layout Standard
6719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6720 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6721 Code, look at section
6722 \begin_inset space ~
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6728 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6741 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6748 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6749 For capital Roman numerals replace
6761 in the command above.
6762 For Arabic numerals use
6770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6777 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6792 \begin_layout Standard
6794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6802 You can only number 26
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6806 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6815 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6816 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6820 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6824 \begin_inset Argument 1
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_inset Argument 1
6857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6880 \begin_layout Enumerate
6885 \begin_layout Enumerate
6886 \begin_inset Argument 1
6889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_layout Enumerate
6914 \begin_inset Argument 1
6917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Standard
6944 For this list these commands were used:
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \begin_inset Newline newline
6966 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6991 makes the label emphasized and
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7010 lists until you change the definition.
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7036 \begin_layout Enumerate
7037 \begin_inset Argument 1
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_inset Note Note
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 goes back to default numbering
7071 \begin_layout Enumerate
7075 \begin_layout Standard
7079 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7084 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7089 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7090 to indicate that it is a resumed
7091 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7092 , but in the output.
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7116 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7117 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7118 of a normal enumeration.
7119 There, insert the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7133 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7141 \begin_layout Enumerate
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7146 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7149 \begin_layout Enumerate
7150 \begin_inset Argument 1
7153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 This enumeration starts at 4
7172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7174 \begin_inset Index idx
7177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7187 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7189 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7192 \begin_layout Itemize
7196 \begin_layout Itemize
7197 with standard spacing
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7203 Add there the command
7207 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_inset Argument 1
7214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Itemize
7237 \begin_layout Itemize
7241 \begin_layout Standard
7242 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7249 \begin_inset Index idx
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 -packages ! enumitem
7260 For more information see its documentation,
7261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7271 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7273 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7274 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7278 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7281 \begin_layout Enumerate
7282 \begin_inset Argument 1
7285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 with negative indentation
7310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7311 Further Customization
7312 \begin_inset Index idx
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 Lists ! Customization
7324 \begin_layout Standard
7325 You can also change the style of description lists.
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 changes the description label font, the command
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7346 sets the list style.
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 An example where the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7358 itshape, style=nextline
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7365 \begin_layout Description
7367 \begin_inset space ~
7371 \begin_inset Argument 1
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7382 itshape, style=nextline
7392 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7393 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7397 \begin_layout Description
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7402 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7403 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7404 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7408 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7414 \begin_inset Index idx
7417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7419 -packages ! enumitem
7425 For more information see its documentation
7426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7435 \begin_layout Subsection
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7451 \begin_inset space ~
7454 Address: An Overview
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7458 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7459 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7473 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7474 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7475 gags on the document.
7476 In contrast, you can use the
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7488 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7489 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 Of course, you're not limited to using
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7515 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7516 some European academic papers.
7519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7523 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7530 \begin_layout Standard
7535 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7536 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7545 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7546 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7547 Here's an example of each:
7550 \begin_layout Right Address
7552 \begin_inset Newline newline
7556 \begin_inset Newline newline
7560 \begin_inset Newline newline
7563 When is it? What is today?
7566 \begin_layout Standard
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7576 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7578 the largest block of text on a single line.
7579 Here's an example of the
7586 \begin_layout Address
7588 \begin_inset Newline newline
7591 Where do I send this
7592 \begin_inset Newline newline
7595 Your post office and country
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7599 As you can see, both
7606 \begin_inset space ~
7611 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7616 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7617 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7623 This makes sense, since
7631 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7632 Thus, you have to use
7639 arg "newline-insert newline"
7644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7645 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7651 \begin_inset space ~
7656 ) to start a new line in an
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7671 \begin_layout Subsection
7675 \begin_layout Standard
7676 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7677 or list of references.
7679 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7684 \begin_inset Index idx
7687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7701 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7702 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7703 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7704 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7718 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7719 The book document classes ignores the
7723 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7727 in a letter document class.
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7735 environment does several things for you.
7736 First, it puts the centered label
7737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7745 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7747 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7748 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7749 the subsequent text.
7750 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7752 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7757 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7761 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7762 The new paragraph will still be in the
7767 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7768 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 \begin_inset Float figure
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7779 \begin_inset Graphics
7780 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7788 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7793 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7814 \begin_layout Standard
7815 We would love to demonstrate the
7819 environment, but since this document is in the
7820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7827 class, we can't do this.
7828 We inserted it therefore as figure
7829 \begin_inset space ~
7833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7835 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 If you have never heard of an
7841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7848 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7853 \begin_inset Index idx
7856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7865 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7872 \begin_layout Standard
7877 environment is used to list references.
7878 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7879 only use it at the end of the document.
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 When you first open a
7896 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7897 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7913 depending on the document class.
7914 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7915 Each paragraph of the
7919 environment is a bibliography entry.
7924 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7925 Each new paragraph is still in the
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7934 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7936 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7938 handling, have a look at section
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7945 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7952 \begin_layout Subsection
7953 Special Environments
7956 \begin_layout Standard
7958 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7959 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7980 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7987 \begin_layout Standard
7993 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7995 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8000 key as a fixed whitespace.
8004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8017 \begin_inset space ~
8022 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8040 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8043 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8046 arg "newline-insert newline"
8063 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8064 So, when you finish using the
8069 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8070 Also, you can nest the
8075 environment inside of others.
8078 \begin_layout Standard
8079 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8082 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8094 \begin_inset space \space{}
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 arg "newline-insert newline"
8124 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8130 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8132 You must put at least one
8136 in any line you want blank.
8137 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8141 \begin_layout Itemize
8142 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8146 since that will insert
8151 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8154 arg "self-insert \""
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8164 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8168 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8172 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8181 printf("Hello World!
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout Standard
8195 This is just the standard
8196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8213 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8215 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8216 as if you used a typewriter.
8217 \begin_inset Index idx
8220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8221 Paragraph environments|)
8226 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8229 Program Code Listings
8234 \begin_inset space ~
8242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8246 \begin_inset Index idx
8249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8258 \begin_layout Standard
8263 environment is similar to the
8268 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8269 computer console text.
8274 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8288 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8289 you can have empty lines.
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 have a certain language and a text style
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8307 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8308 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8309 and \SpecialChar TeX
8313 \begin_layout Standard
8314 Because of these properties
8318 works like a typewriter.
8322 \begin_layout Verbatim
8327 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 The following 2 lines are empty:
8334 \begin_layout Verbatim
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8349 \begin_layout Standard
8354 environment is identical to
8358 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8359 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8366 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8371 \begin_layout Section
8372 Nesting Environments
8373 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8377 Nesting ! Environments
8383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8392 \begin_layout Subsection
8396 \begin_layout Standard
8398 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8400 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8402 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8404 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8416 \begin_layout Enumerate
8420 \begin_layout Enumerate
8425 \begin_layout Enumerate
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Standard
8439 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8440 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8444 \begin_inset space ~
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8465 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8467 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8470 arg "depth-increment"
8476 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 arg "depth-increment"
8496 arg "depth-decrement"
8500 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8501 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8505 \begin_layout Standard
8506 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8507 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8508 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8509 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8510 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8513 \begin_layout Standard
8514 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8516 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8518 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8521 \begin_layout Subsection
8522 What You Can and Can't Nest
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8527 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8532 than a simple yes or no.
8533 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 Completely unnestable
8540 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8550 \begin_layout Standard
8551 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8552 environments have them:
8555 \begin_layout Description
8556 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8557 Can't nest into them.
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Description
8594 \begin_inset space ~
8597 Nestable You can nest them.
8598 You can nest other things into them.
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Description
8665 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8666 You can't nest anything into them.
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_inset space ~
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Standard
8766 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8774 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8784 \begin_inset space ~
8787 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8788 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8789 nested section headings violate this.
8797 \begin_layout Subsection
8798 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8799 \begin_inset Index idx
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8811 \begin_layout Standard
8812 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8813 affected by nesting anyhow.
8817 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Standard
8831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8839 Figures and tables in
8843 are not affected by this.
8848 Have a look at section
8849 \begin_inset space ~
8853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8855 reference "sec:Floats"
8859 for more information about
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8868 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8869 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8873 \begin_layout Standard
8874 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8882 of its own, it behaves just like a
8883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8890 paragraph environment.
8891 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Here's an example with a table:
8899 \begin_layout Enumerate
8904 \begin_layout Enumerate
8905 This is (a) and it's nested.
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8916 \begin_layout Standard
8918 \begin_inset Tabular
8919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8920 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8922 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 \begin_layout Standard
9007 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9014 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9034 This is (a) and it's nested.
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9047 \begin_inset Tabular
9048 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9049 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9135 \begin_layout Standard
9136 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9152 \begin_layout Enumerate
9156 \begin_layout Standard
9157 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9165 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 This is (a) and it's nested.
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9184 \begin_layout Standard
9186 \begin_inset Tabular
9187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9188 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9275 \begin_layout Standard
9276 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9282 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9291 \begin_layout Enumerate
9295 \begin_layout Standard
9296 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9302 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9303 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9307 \begin_layout Subsection
9308 Usage and General Features
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9313 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9322 is the innermost possible depth.
9323 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 level #1 – outermost
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9346 \begin_layout Itemize
9351 \begin_layout Itemize
9360 \begin_layout Standard
9361 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9362 both of them in the example.
9363 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9373 For example, if we tried to nest another
9378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9385 , we would get errors.
9388 \begin_layout Subsection
9390 \begin_inset Index idx
9393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9402 \begin_layout Standard
9403 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9404 We have several examples of nested environments.
9405 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9410 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9413 \begin_layout Labeling
9414 \labelwidthstring MMM
9415 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #2-a This is level #2.
9427 We created it by using
9430 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9436 arg "depth-increment"
9443 \begin_layout Labeling
9444 \labelwidthstring MMM
9445 #3-a This is level #3.
9446 This time, we just enter
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9457 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9461 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9479 environment, nested inside of
9480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9488 So, it's at level #4.
9489 We did this by entering
9492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9498 arg "depth-increment"
9501 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9506 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9522 \begin_layout Standard
9527 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9536 \begin_layout Labeling
9537 \labelwidthstring MMM
9538 #4-a This is level #4.
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9545 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9550 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9554 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9559 keep nesting things inside
9560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9571 \begin_layout Labeling
9572 \labelwidthstring MMM
9573 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9578 \begin_layout Labeling
9579 \labelwidthstring MMM
9580 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9581 and this is level #6.
9582 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #5-b Back to level #5.
9592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9598 arg "depth-decrement"
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9616 arg "depth-decrement"
9619 , we're back at level #4.
9623 \begin_layout Labeling
9624 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 #3-b Back to level #3.
9626 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9630 \begin_layout Labeling
9631 \labelwidthstring MMM
9632 #2-b Back to level #2.
9637 \begin_layout Labeling
9638 \labelwidthstring MMM
9639 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9640 After this sentence, we will enter
9644 and change the paragraph environment back to
9651 \begin_layout Standard
9652 We could have also used the
9668 environment in place of the
9673 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9676 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9677 Example 2: Inheritance
9680 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9681 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9684 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 arg "depth-increment"
9697 \begin_inset Newline newline
9700 which, we will change to the
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 environment, at level #2.
9716 \begin_layout Enumerate
9717 Notice how the nested
9721 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9725 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9730 We ended this example by entering
9735 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9739 and reset the nesting depth by using
9742 arg "depth-decrement"
9748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9749 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9758 \begin_inset Argument 1
9761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9762 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 This is level #1, in an
9775 paragraph environment.
9776 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9780 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9791 arg "depth-increment"
9795 Now, what happens if we nest an
9799 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9800 label be? An asterisk?
9804 \begin_layout Itemize
9814 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9815 So, its label is a bullet.
9816 (We got here by using
9819 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9825 arg "depth-increment"
9828 , then changing the environment to
9836 \begin_layout Itemize
9837 Here's level #4, produced using
9840 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9846 arg "depth-increment"
9850 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9855 \begin_layout Enumerate
9858 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9863 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9867 , because we are in the
9875 environment (that is, it is an
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9895 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9896 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9904 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9907 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9910 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 arg "depth-decrement"
9917 to decrease the depth after the next
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9934 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9937 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9951 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9956 reset the counter for the label.
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9964 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9970 arg "depth-decrement"
9973 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9974 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9975 into the twofold-nested
9983 \begin_layout Enumerate
9984 The same thing happens if we do another
9987 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9993 arg "depth-decrement"
9996 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9999 \begin_layout Standard
10000 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10005 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10016 The number of other
10020 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10027 The same rule applies for the
10031 environment, as well.
10034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10035 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10038 \begin_layout Enumerate
10039 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10040 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10041 the same detail with how we did it.
10050 \begin_layout Standard
10058 arg "depth-increment"
10065 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10066 the example in parentheses someplace.
10067 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10068 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10069 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10073 \begin_layout Enumerate
10078 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10082 \begin_layout Verse
10083 Now we will add verse.
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 It will get much worse.
10088 \begin_inset Newline newline
10098 arg "depth-increment"
10108 \begin_layout Verse
10109 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10114 \begin_inset Newline newline
10120 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10128 \begin_layout Verse
10129 Here comes a table:
10133 \begin_layout Standard
10134 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10140 \begin_layout Standard
10142 \begin_inset Tabular
10143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10144 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10231 \begin_layout Verse
10235 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10245 arg "depth-increment"
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 \begin_inset Newline newline
10265 arg "depth-decrement"
10272 \begin_layout Enumerate
10277 : level #1) This is another item.
10278 Note that selecting a
10282 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10283 3 times to put the table inside the
10291 \begin_layout Quotation
10292 We're now ending the
10296 list and changing to
10301 We're still at level #1.
10302 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10303 The next set of paragraphs is a
10304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10311 We will nest both the
10318 \begin_inset space ~
10323 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10327 for the letter body.
10331 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10334 to preserve the depth.
10335 Remember that you need to use
10338 arg "newline-insert newline"
10341 to create multiple lines inside the
10348 \begin_inset space ~
10358 \begin_layout Right Address
10360 \begin_inset Newline newline
10363 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10364 \begin_inset Newline newline
10370 \begin_layout Address
10372 \begin_inset space ~
10378 \begin_layout Quotation
10379 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10383 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10384 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10385 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10386 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10387 as soon as possible.
10388 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10393 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10394 with your order, along with payment.
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We thank you again for your patience.
10401 \begin_layout Address
10403 \begin_inset Newline newline
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 That ends that example!
10414 \begin_layout Standard
10415 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10416 gives you a lot of power with just
10418 We could have easily nested an
10439 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10442 \begin_layout Subsection
10444 \begin_inset Index idx
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10448 Nesting ! Separation
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10456 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10463 \begin_layout Standard
10464 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10466 For example you need two different enumerations:
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 \begin_layout Enumerate
10479 \begin_layout Enumerate
10483 \begin_layout Standard
10484 \begin_inset Separator plain
10490 \begin_layout Itemize
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10511 \begin_layout Enumerate
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10516 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10517 list item and use the menu
10519 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10520 Start New Environment
10523 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10524 ) and behind it the new list.
10527 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10528 Start New Parent Environment
10530 only appears if the item is nested.
10531 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10535 \begin_layout Standard
10536 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10537 (red arrow in LyX).
10538 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10539 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10542 \begin_layout Standard
10543 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10546 arg "paragraph-break"
10553 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10556 \begin_layout Section
10557 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10558 \begin_inset Index idx
10561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10570 \begin_layout Standard
10571 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10572 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10574 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10575 be broken at the end of a line.
10576 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10580 \begin_layout Subsection
10582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10584 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10589 \begin_inset Index idx
10592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10601 \begin_layout Standard
10602 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10603 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10604 ) not to break the line at
10606 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10609 \begin_layout Quote
10610 Further documentation is given in section
10611 \begin_inset Newline newline
10615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10617 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10625 \begin_layout Standard
10626 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10641 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10650 A protected space is set with
10652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10653 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10655 \begin_inset space ~
10663 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10669 \begin_layout Subsection
10671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10673 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10678 \begin_inset Index idx
10681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10682 Spacing ! Horizontal
10690 \begin_layout Standard
10691 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10694 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10698 The length units are listed in Appendix
10699 \begin_inset space ~
10703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10705 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10716 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10721 \begin_inset Index idx
10724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10725 Spaces ! Inter-word
10733 \begin_layout Standard
10734 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10735 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10736 at the ends of sentences.
10737 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10738 automatically takes care about this.
10739 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10740 followed by a period; see section
10741 \begin_inset space ~
10745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10747 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10752 To insert a normal space, select
10754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10755 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10765 arg "space-insert normal"
10771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10775 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10780 \begin_inset Index idx
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10801 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10810 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10811 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10812 inside abbreviations:
10815 \begin_layout Quote
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10821 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10824 \begin_layout Standard
10825 or between values and units.
10826 Compare for example this:
10827 \begin_inset Newline newline
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 \begin_inset Newline newline
10838 10 kg (normal space
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10845 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10847 \begin_inset space ~
10855 arg "space-insert thin"
10861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10865 \begin_layout Standard
10866 You can also insert the following space types:
10869 \begin_layout Description
10871 \begin_inset space ~
10875 \begin_inset space ~
10878 space A line with a
10879 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10883 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10887 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10890 negative thin space between the arrows.
10893 \begin_layout Description
10895 \begin_inset space ~
10899 \begin_inset space ~
10902 space A line with a
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10907 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10911 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10914 negative medium space between the arrows.
10917 \begin_layout Description
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10923 \begin_inset space ~
10926 space A line with a
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10931 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10935 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10938 negative thick space between the arrows.
10941 \begin_layout Description
10943 \begin_inset space ~
10947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10955 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10959 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10963 \begin_inset space ~
10967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 em) space between the arrows.
10973 \begin_layout Description
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10987 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10991 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10995 \begin_inset space ~
10999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11002 em) space between the arrows.
11005 \begin_layout Description
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11019 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11023 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11034 em) space between the arrows.
11037 \begin_layout Description
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11047 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11052 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11059 cm space between the arrows.
11062 \begin_layout Standard
11064 \begin_inset space ~
11068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11070 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11074 lists the different space sizes.
11077 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset Float table
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11089 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11093 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset Tabular
11104 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11105 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11106 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11107 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11382 \begin_inset Index idx
11385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11396 feature for adding extra space
11397 in a uniform fashion.
11398 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11399 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11400 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11401 equally between themselves.
11404 \begin_layout Standard
11405 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11408 \begin_layout Quote
11410 This is on the left side
11411 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 This is on the right
11417 \begin_layout Quote
11420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Standard
11448 That was an example in the
11454 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11462 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11465 is one in a standard paragraph.
11466 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11470 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11474 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11477 \begin_inset space ~
11482 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11487 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11566 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11570 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11572 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11573 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11577 option in the space dialog.
11585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11589 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11594 \begin_inset Index idx
11597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11607 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11608 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11611 \begin_layout Standard
11612 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11615 What is correct English?:
11616 \begin_inset Newline newline
11620 \begin_inset Newline newline
11624 \begin_inset space ~
11627 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11664 \begin_layout Standard
11666 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11671 \begin_inset space ~
11675 \begin_inset space ~
11679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11683 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11686 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11690 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11696 \begin_inset space ~
11700 \begin_inset space ~
11704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11707 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11717 That is why it is named
11718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11726 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11727 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11731 \begin_layout Subsection
11733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11735 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11740 \begin_inset Index idx
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11752 \begin_layout Standard
11753 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11756 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11758 \begin_inset space ~
11764 There you find the following sizes:
11767 \begin_layout Standard
11780 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11781 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11786 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11789 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11791 \begin_inset space ~
11797 \begin_inset Index idx
11800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11801 Document ! Settings
11806 for the paragraph separation.
11807 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11818 \begin_layout Standard
11824 \begin_inset Index idx
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11833 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11834 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11839 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11840 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11849 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 s are described in section
11859 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11865 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11874 If there are several
11878 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11879 You can therefore use
11883 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11886 \begin_layout Standard
11891 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11898 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11905 \begin_layout Standard
11906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11916 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11917 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11929 \begin_layout Subsection
11930 Paragraph Alignment
11931 \begin_inset Index idx
11934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 Paragraph ! Alignment
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 dialog (toolbar button
11952 arg "layout-paragraph"
11956 There are five possibilities:
11959 \begin_layout Itemize
11967 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12029 \begin_layout Standard
12030 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12031 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12032 the left and right margins.
12033 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 This paragraph is right aligned,
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12043 this one is centered,
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 this one is left aligned.
12051 \begin_layout Subsection
12053 \begin_inset Index idx
12056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 Page breaks ! Forced
12063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12065 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12072 \begin_layout Standard
12073 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12074 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12075 force a page break where you want one.
12076 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12077 is good at page breaking.
12078 Only if you use a lot of
12082 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12083 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12088 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12092 have to change the page breaking.
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12098 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12103 \begin_inset space ~
12109 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 \begin_inset space ~
12119 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12121 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12122 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12127 at the top of a page.
12128 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12130 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12131 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12132 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12136 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12140 to learn more about
12147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12151 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12156 \begin_inset Index idx
12159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12160 Page breaks ! Clear
12168 \begin_layout Standard
12169 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12170 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12171 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12172 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12173 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12177 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12182 \begin_inset space ~
12188 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12202 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12203 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12206 \begin_layout Subsection
12208 \begin_inset Index idx
12211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12220 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12227 \begin_layout Standard
12228 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12230 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12247 arg "newline-insert newline"
12251 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12268 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12271 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12273 This is useful to avoid
12274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12281 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12284 \begin_layout Standard
12285 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12286 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12288 very good at line breaking.
12289 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12290 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12291 \begin_inset space ~
12295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12297 reference "sec:Quote"
12302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12304 reference "sec:Verse"
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12318 \begin_layout Subsection
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12322 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12327 \begin_inset Index idx
12330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12339 \begin_layout Standard
12341 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12364 you can insert horizontal lines.
12365 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12366 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12367 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12372 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12383 \begin_layout Section
12384 Characters and Symbols
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12388 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12389 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12390 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12398 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12402 for information on how this is done.
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12411 dialog via the menu
12413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12414 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12421 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12429 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12430 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12432 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12440 \begin_layout Section
12441 Fonts and Text Styles
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12444 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12451 \begin_layout Subsection
12453 \begin_inset Index idx
12456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12466 There are two types of fonts:
12469 \begin_layout Description
12471 \begin_inset space ~
12475 \begin_inset Index idx
12478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12484 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12489 characters) in the font.
12490 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12491 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12492 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12493 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12494 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12495 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12496 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12497 \begin_inset Newline newline
12500 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12501 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12502 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12503 sizes than at small ones.
12504 \begin_inset Newline newline
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12526 \begin_layout Description
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_inset Index idx
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12541 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12542 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12543 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12544 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12545 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12546 image manipulation program.
12547 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12548 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12552 pixels high up to 34
12553 \begin_inset space ~
12556 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12557 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12558 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12560 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12561 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12562 \begin_inset Newline newline
12565 Bitmap fonts are named
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12573 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12576 \begin_layout Standard
12577 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12578 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12579 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12580 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12581 use scalable fonts.
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12590 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12591 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12592 font to emphasize text, you use an
12593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12601 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12603 In \SpecialChar LyX
12604 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12608 \begin_layout Subsection
12611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12613 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12621 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12622 used its own fonts.
12623 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12624 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12628 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12629 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12630 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12631 to a word processor.
12632 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12633 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 files are very portable across
12635 different machines.
12636 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 has increased a lot
12638 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12641 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12654 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12655 code in the document
12656 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12660 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 engines that are also able directly
12662 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12664 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12666 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12668 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12669 that is installed on your system.
12670 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12682 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12683 es; so you might have to experiment.
12691 \begin_layout Subsection
12692 Document Font and Font size
12693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12695 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 \begin_inset Index idx
12713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_layout Standard
12723 You can set the document fonts in the
12725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12729 \begin_inset Index idx
12732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 Document ! Settings
12743 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12744 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12747 \begin_inset space ~
12756 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12761 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12764 \begin_layout Standard
12769 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12770 This requires that you use
12782 as the output format, i.
12783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12787 \begin_inset space \space{}
12790 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12791 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12792 installed (see section
12793 \begin_inset space ~
12797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12799 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12804 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12806 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12807 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12812 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12813 cannot determine the family.
12814 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12815 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12818 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12821 \begin_layout Standard
12822 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12823 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12828 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12834 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12835 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12862 European Computer Modern
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12875 \begin_layout Standard
12884 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12885 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12890 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12893 \begin_inset space ~
12898 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12904 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12905 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12908 \begin_layout Itemize
12912 \begin_inset space ~
12917 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12935 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12936 community in order to replace
12940 as the default font.
12941 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12942 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12945 \begin_inset space ~
12958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12959 One difference is improved kerning.
12967 \begin_layout Itemize
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12980 fonts in (the rare) case that
12983 \begin_inset space ~
12988 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13003 Virtual means that it
13004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13015 -glyphs from other fonts.
13016 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13044 \begin_inset Index idx
13047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13049 -packages ! aeguill
13054 with the document preamble line
13055 \begin_inset Newline newline
13062 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13063 \begin_inset Newline newline
13068 will fix the guillemet problem.
13073 and that accented characters are not
13077 glyph, but built of
13081 characters, the accent and the letter.
13082 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13088 If you search for example for the French word
13089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13105 and not for the glyph
13106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13120 \begin_layout Itemize
13121 If you do not like the look of
13129 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13150 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13154 serif and typewriter fonts,
13158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13159 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13166 \begin_inset space ~
13175 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13192 \begin_inset space \space{}
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13216 but you can also select your own.
13217 \begin_inset Newline newline
13220 The differences between roman,
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13232 fonts are explained in section
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13239 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13244 \begin_inset Newline newline
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13255 was originally designed for newspapers.
13256 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13257 into the small newspaper columns.
13261 \begin_inset space ~
13266 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13283 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13288 depends on the class you are using.
13289 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13292 \begin_layout Standard
13293 Note that the font size is the
13298 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13299 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13300 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13301 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13310 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13317 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13324 \begin_layout Standard
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13333 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13335 \begin_inset space ~
13338 serif or typewriter.
13343 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13353 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13356 \begin_layout Standard
13361 LaTeX font encoding
13363 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13364 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13370 \begin_inset Index idx
13373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13375 -packages ! fontenc
13381 \begin_inset space ~
13385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13387 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13392 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13393 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13400 \begin_layout Standard
13401 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13407 Use True Small Caps
13410 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13413 Use Old Style Figures
13415 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13417 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13425 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13429 Use True Small Caps
13431 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13432 of scaled capitals.
13433 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13434 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13442 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13443 a font to display the script characters.
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13454 \begin_inset Index idx
13457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13464 So this has no effect for the document language
13478 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13490 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13495 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13496 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13498 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13503 dialog, see section
13504 \begin_inset space ~
13508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13510 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13522 \begin_layout Subsection
13526 \begin_layout Standard
13527 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13528 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13530 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13531 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13532 choose a math font in the dialog
13534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13538 \begin_inset Index idx
13541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13542 Document ! Settings
13548 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13549 automatically selects a math font.
13550 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13551 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13571 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13572 document font is available.
13575 \begin_layout Standard
13576 Note that the math font will not be used for
13580 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13586 or by the insertion of the command
13593 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13594 \begin_inset space ~
13598 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13599 while the math characters do not.
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13604 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13615 \begin_inset space ~
13620 in the document font settings.
13623 \begin_layout Standard
13624 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13625 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13626 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13627 font (in most cases
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset space ~
13640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13643 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13644 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13664 \begin_layout Subsection
13665 Using Different Character Styles
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13676 \begin_inset Index idx
13679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13688 \begin_layout Standard
13689 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13690 automatically changes the character style for certain
13691 paragraph environments.
13693 supports two character styles,
13702 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13711 style, do one of the following:
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 click on the toolbar button
13724 \begin_layout Itemize
13725 use the key binding
13734 \begin_layout Standard
13735 These commands are all toggles.
13740 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13743 \begin_layout Standard
13744 One typically uses the
13748 style for proper names.
13750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13757 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13766 A more widely used character style is the
13771 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 clicking on the toolbar button
13788 \begin_layout Itemize
13789 using the keybindings
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13803 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13805 use a different font.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 We've been using the
13813 style all over the place in this document.
13814 Here's one more example:
13817 \begin_layout Quotation
13820 Do not overuse character styles!
13823 \begin_layout Standard
13824 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13825 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13826 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13827 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13831 \begin_layout Standard
13832 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13840 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13842 \begin_inset space ~
13845 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13851 arg "dialog-show character"
13857 \begin_layout Subsection
13858 Fine-Tuning with the
13863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13865 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13870 \begin_inset Index idx
13873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13885 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13886 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13887 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13888 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13889 from ordinary dialog.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13894 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13895 \begin_inset Newline newline
13898 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13899 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13902 \begin_layout Standard
13903 To use custom character styles, open the
13905 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13907 \begin_inset space ~
13910 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13913 dialog or press the toolbar button
13916 arg "dialog-show character"
13920 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13921 font property that you can choose.
13922 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13925 \begin_inset space ~
13930 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13935 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13936 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13937 environments all at once.
13940 \begin_layout Standard
13941 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13944 \begin_inset space ~
13956 \begin_layout Labeling
13957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13971 The possible options are:
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13981 This is the Roman font family.
13982 Normally a serif font.
13983 It's also the default family.
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 \begin_inset space ~
14005 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14017 \begin_layout Labeling
14018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14025 This is the Typewriter font family.
14031 arg "font-typewriter"
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14046 This corresponds to the print weight.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14057 This is the Medium font series.
14058 It's also the default series.
14061 \begin_layout Labeling
14062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 This is the Bold font series.
14082 \begin_layout Labeling
14083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14088 As the name implies.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14099 This is the Upright font shape.
14100 It's also the default shape.
14103 \begin_layout Labeling
14104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14118 s the Italic font shape
14124 \begin_layout Labeling
14125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14132 This is the Slanted font shape
14134 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14135 , this is different from italic).
14138 \begin_layout Labeling
14139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14143 \begin_inset space ~
14150 This is the Small caps font shape
14157 \begin_layout Labeling
14158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14163 Alters the text color.
14164 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14173 , which means that the document default color set in
14175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14182 \begin_inset space ~
14187 is used, you can choose between
14264 \begin_inset Index idx
14267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14276 \begin_layout Labeling
14277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14282 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14283 the language of the document.
14284 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14285 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14287 \begin_inset Newline newline
14290 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14292 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14293 When using the spell checking (see section
14294 \begin_inset space ~
14298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14300 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14304 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14307 \begin_layout Labeling
14308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14313 Alters the size of the font.
14314 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14315 proportional to the document font size.
14316 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14317 the details, but a general description of what
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14345 arg "font-size tiny"
14351 \begin_layout Labeling
14352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14373 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14379 \begin_layout Labeling
14380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14401 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14407 \begin_layout Labeling
14408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14429 arg "font-size small"
14435 \begin_layout Labeling
14436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 It's also the default size.
14454 arg "font-size normal"
14460 \begin_layout Labeling
14461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size large"
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14510 arg "font-size larger"
14516 \begin_layout Labeling
14517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14538 arg "font-size largest"
14544 \begin_layout Labeling
14545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14566 arg "font-size huge"
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14594 arg "font-size giant"
14600 \begin_layout Labeling
14601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14606 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14626 arg "font-size increase"
14632 \begin_layout Labeling
14633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14638 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14658 arg "font-size decrease"
14665 \begin_layout Standard
14670 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14671 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14673 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14674 — use those instead.
14675 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14678 \begin_layout Labeling
14679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14684 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14689 \begin_layout Labeling
14690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14697 This is text with emphasize on
14700 This might seem like the same as
14704 , but it is actually a bit different.
14710 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14712 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14715 \begin_layout Labeling
14716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14723 This is text with Underbar on.
14729 arg "font-underline"
14735 \begin_inset Newline newline
14740 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14741 when you could not change fonts.
14742 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14743 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14744 because some people
14748 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14751 \begin_layout Labeling
14752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14756 \begin_inset space ~
14763 This is text with Double underbar on.
14769 arg "font-underunderline"
14773 \begin_inset Newline newline
14776 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14777 about double underbar.
14780 \begin_layout Labeling
14781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14792 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14798 arg "font-underwave"
14802 \begin_inset Newline newline
14805 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14806 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14809 \begin_layout Labeling
14810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14817 This is text with Strikeout on.
14823 arg "font-strikeout"
14827 \begin_inset Newline newline
14830 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14831 changed in the meantime.
14834 \begin_layout Labeling
14835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14842 This is text with Noun on.
14849 , this is a logical attribute.
14850 Normally it's equivalent to
14853 \begin_inset space ~
14862 \begin_layout Standard
14863 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14864 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14871 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 arg "dialog-show character"
14880 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14881 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14884 arg "textstyle-apply"
14888 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14892 \begin_layout Standard
14893 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14900 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14901 (suppose you just set the shape to
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14920 \begin_inset space ~
14932 \begin_layout Standard
14933 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14953 \begin_layout Itemize
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14988 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15002 \begin_inset Note Note
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15006 For more on phantoms see section
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15013 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15023 \begin_inset Newline newline
15029 \begin_layout Itemize
15034 fonts use characters with serifs.
15035 These are the small
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15044 The following example shows the difference:
15045 \begin_inset Newline newline
15049 \begin_inset Newline newline
15054 text without serifs
15057 \begin_inset Newline newline
15060 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15061 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15068 \begin_layout Itemize
15073 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15074 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15075 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15086 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15087 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15095 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15096 the property to be removed.
15097 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15098 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15099 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15117 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15118 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15126 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15130 \begin_inset space ~
15135 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15146 If you, for example, set
15147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15165 \begin_inset space ~
15170 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15179 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15182 \begin_layout Standard
15183 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15184 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15187 \begin_layout Section
15188 Printing and Previewing
15191 \begin_layout Subsection
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15197 using \SpecialChar LyX
15198 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15199 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15200 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15201 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15203 Additional Features
15208 \begin_layout Standard
15210 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15213 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15214 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15215 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15218 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15219 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15220 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15221 to turn your writing into printable output.
15222 This happens in two stages:
15225 \begin_layout Enumerate
15226 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15227 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15229 a file with the extension,
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15244 \begin_layout Enumerate
15245 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15246 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 to use the commands in the
15251 file to produce printable output.
15254 \begin_layout Subsection
15255 Output file formats
15256 \begin_inset Index idx
15259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15268 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15276 Simple text (ASCII)
15277 \begin_inset Index idx
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 File formats ! ASCII
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15290 This file type has the extension
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15303 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15307 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15314 \begin_layout Standard
15315 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15317 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15318 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15326 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15327 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15328 bibliography (section
15329 \begin_inset space ~
15333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15335 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15340 If your document includes such material, use
15342 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15343 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15349 \begin_inset space ~
15353 \begin_inset space ~
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15371 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15372 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15378 \begin_inset Index idx
15381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15392 This file type has the extension
15393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -Errors or to process it manually
15410 with console commands.
15411 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15412 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15413 's temporary directory whenever you
15414 view or export your document.
15417 \begin_layout Standard
15418 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 -file using the menu
15421 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15422 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15426 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 export variants are explained in section
15428 \begin_inset space ~
15432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15434 reference "subsec:Export"
15441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15443 \begin_inset Index idx
15446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15455 \begin_layout Standard
15456 This file type has the extension
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15477 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15478 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15479 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15485 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15486 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15487 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15488 when you view the DVI.
15489 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15493 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15495 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15496 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15504 \begin_inset space ~
15510 The latter option uses the program
15512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15518 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15521 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15522 font access (see section
15523 \begin_inset space ~
15527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15529 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15534 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15542 \begin_inset Index idx
15545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15546 File formats ! PostScript
15554 \begin_layout Standard
15555 This file type has the extension
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15568 PostScript was developed by the company
15572 as a printer language.
15573 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15575 PostScript can be seen as a
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15579 programming language
15580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15588 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15595 \begin_inset Index idx
15598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15600 -packages ! pstricks
15610 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15613 \begin_layout Standard
15614 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 Encapsulated PostScript
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 (EPS, file extension
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 As \SpecialChar LyX
15636 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15637 convert them in the background to EPS.
15638 If, for example, you have 50
15639 \begin_inset space ~
15642 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15644 \begin_inset space ~
15647 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15648 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15650 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15651 EPS to avoid this problem.
15654 \begin_layout Standard
15655 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15657 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15658 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15676 \begin_inset Index idx
15679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15688 \begin_layout Standard
15689 This file type has the extension
15690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15706 Portable Document Format
15707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 was derived from PostScript.
15715 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15725 looks exactly the same.
15728 \begin_layout Standard
15729 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 (JPG, file extension
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 Portable Network Graphics
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 (PNG, file extension
15770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15782 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15783 converts them in the
15784 background to one of these formats.
15785 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15786 will slow down your workflow.
15787 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15790 \begin_layout Standard
15791 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15793 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15799 \begin_layout Description
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15804 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15808 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15811 \begin_layout Description
15813 \begin_inset space ~
15820 ) This uses the program
15822 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15825 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15828 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15831 is a new engine, derived from
15835 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15836 access (see section
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15843 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15849 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15854 \begin_layout Description
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15863 ) This uses the program
15868 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15874 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15875 font access (see section
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15882 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15887 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15888 vertically written Japanese.
15891 \begin_layout Description
15893 \begin_inset space ~
15896 (cropped) This is the same as
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15904 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15905 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15906 to generate good-looking
15907 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15910 \begin_layout Description
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15915 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15919 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15923 \begin_layout Description
15925 \begin_inset space ~
15928 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15932 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15933 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15937 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15938 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15945 \begin_inset space ~
15954 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15955 works without problems.
15956 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15957 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15969 \begin_inset space ~
15974 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15988 FileFormats ! XHTML
15994 \begin_inset Index idx
15997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16006 \begin_layout Standard
16007 This file type has the extension
16008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16020 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16021 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16022 When \SpecialChar LyX
16023 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16024 suitable for the purpose.
16025 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16031 between different formats, which are described in section
16033 Math Output in XHTML
16038 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_layout Standard
16047 XHTML output remains
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16056 features are supported yet.
16060 and the World Wide Web
16064 Additional Features
16066 manual, for more information.
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16072 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16073 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16079 \begin_layout Subsection
16081 \begin_inset Index idx
16084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16093 \begin_layout Standard
16094 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16095 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16104 or use the toolbar button
16111 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16112 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16123 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16125 \begin_inset space ~
16129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16131 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16136 Further output formats can be selected via
16138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16139 View (Other Formats)
16141 or the toolbar button
16150 \begin_layout Standard
16151 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16152 viewer window using the menu
16154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16160 Update (Other Formats)
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16166 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16169 To have a real output, export your document.
16172 \begin_layout Section
16173 A few Words about Typography
16174 \begin_inset Index idx
16177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16186 \begin_layout Subsection
16187 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Index idx
16201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 \begin_layout Standard
16211 In \SpecialChar LyX
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16224 character comes in four lengths: the
16236 , and the minus sign:
16237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16243 \begin_layout Standard
16244 \begin_inset Tabular
16245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16247 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16248 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16249 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16250 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16319 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 \begin_inset space ~
16349 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16356 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16386 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16441 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16447 \begin_layout Standard
16448 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 character multiple times in a row.
16461 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16462 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16496 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16497 math mode and has a length of its own.
16498 Here are some examples:
16501 \begin_layout Enumerate
16502 line- and page-breaks
16503 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16513 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 Oh — there's a dash.
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16552 \begin_layout Subsection
16554 \begin_inset Index idx
16557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16566 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16573 \begin_layout Standard
16574 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16575 but automatically in the output.
16576 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16582 \begin_inset Index idx
16585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16592 following the rules of the document language.
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16597 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16601 font and with unusual constructs, like
16602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16610 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16611 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16612 This is done with the menu
16614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16615 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16623 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16631 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16642 would then see the hyphen
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 as a hyphenation possibility.
16651 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16652 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16653 as described in section
16655 Prevent Hyphenation
16660 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_layout Subsection
16670 \begin_inset Index idx
16673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16683 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16686 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16693 \begin_layout Standard
16694 When \SpecialChar LyX
16695 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16696 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16698 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 appropriate amount of space.
16705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16708 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16710 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16711 gets after another word.
16714 \begin_layout Standard
16715 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16716 not work in all cases.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16730 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 Here are some examples of
16738 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16741 \begin_layout Itemize
16746 \begin_layout Itemize
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16755 \begin_layout Itemize
16757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16761 this is too much space!
16764 \begin_layout Itemize
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16770 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16774 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16777 \begin_layout Enumerate
16781 \begin_inset space ~
16786 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16787 \begin_inset space ~
16791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16793 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16798 \begin_inset Index idx
16801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16802 Spaces ! inter-word
16810 \begin_layout Enumerate
16814 \begin_inset space ~
16819 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16826 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16831 \begin_inset Index idx
16834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16843 \begin_layout Enumerate
16847 \begin_inset space ~
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16855 \begin_inset space ~
16862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16869 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16870 This function is also bound to
16873 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16879 \begin_layout Standard
16880 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16883 \begin_layout Itemize
16885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16889 \begin_inset space \space{}
16892 this is too much space!
16895 \begin_layout Itemize
16896 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16902 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 will take care of this.
16907 \begin_layout Standard
16908 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16912 \begin_inset space ~
16918 feature described in the section
16920 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16925 Additional Features
16930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16932 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16934 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16938 \begin_inset Index idx
16941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16943 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16945 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16961 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16994 \begin_layout Standard
16997 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
16999 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17003 Specifically, it will
17004 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17006 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17010 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17015 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17016 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17018 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17031 The keyboard character,
17035 , generates this automatically.
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 You can specify what character the
17044 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17048 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17057 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17061 \begin_inset Index idx
17064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 Document ! Settings
17071 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17073 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17079 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17082 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17083 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17087 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17089 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17095 \begin_layout Labeling
17096 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17099 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17110 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset space ~
17128 \begin_inset Quotes els
17132 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17140 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17142 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17152 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17164 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17166 \begin_inset Quotes els
17170 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17173 quotation marks (as common, e.
17174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17182 \begin_layout Labeling
17183 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17185 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17188 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17192 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17196 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17198 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17202 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17210 \begin_inset space ~
17214 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17218 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17226 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17227 Use quotes like ”this”
17228 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17230 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17234 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17238 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17242 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17245 quotation marks (as common, e.
17246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17254 \begin_layout Labeling
17255 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17257 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17260 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17268 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17270 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17282 \begin_inset space ~
17286 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17290 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17298 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17300 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17304 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17308 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17310 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17314 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17318 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17322 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17325 quotation marks (as common, e.
17326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17334 \begin_layout Labeling
17335 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17337 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17340 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17344 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17348 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17350 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17354 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17362 \begin_inset space ~
17366 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17370 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17378 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17380 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17384 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17388 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17390 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17394 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17398 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17402 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17405 quotation marks (as common, e.
17406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17414 \begin_layout Labeling
17415 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17417 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17420 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17428 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17430 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17446 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17450 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17458 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17460 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17468 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17470 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17478 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17482 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17485 quotation marks (as common, e.
17486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17489 g., in Switzerland)
17494 \begin_layout Labeling
17495 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17497 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17500 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17504 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17508 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17510 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17514 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset space ~
17526 \begin_inset Quotes als
17530 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17538 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17540 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17544 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17548 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17554 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17558 \begin_inset Quotes als
17562 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17565 quotation marks (as common, e.
17566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17572 \begin_layout Labeling
17573 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17575 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17578 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17582 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17586 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset space ~
17594 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17598 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17604 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17608 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17612 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17616 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17619 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17622 \begin_layout Labeling
17623 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17625 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17628 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17632 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17648 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17654 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17658 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17662 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17666 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17669 quotation marks (as common, e.
17670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17673 g., in Great Britain)
17676 \begin_layout Labeling
17677 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17679 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17682 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17686 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17698 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17702 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17708 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17716 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17720 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17723 quotation marks (as common, e.
17724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17730 \begin_layout Labeling
17731 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17733 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17736 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17740 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17744 \begin_inset space ~
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17752 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17756 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17762 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17766 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17770 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17774 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17777 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17783 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17784 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17785 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17786 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17787 the inner marks differ).
17797 \begin_layout Labeling
17798 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17800 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17803 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17811 \begin_inset space ~
17815 \begin_inset space ~
17819 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17823 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17829 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17837 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17841 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17844 quotation marks (as common, e.
17845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17851 \begin_layout Labeling
17852 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17854 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17857 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17861 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17865 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_inset space ~
17873 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17877 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17883 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17887 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17891 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17895 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17898 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17901 \begin_layout Labeling
17902 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17904 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17905 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17913 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17919 \begin_inset space ~
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17929 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17937 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17941 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17945 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17949 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17953 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17956 quotation marks (as common, e.
17957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17967 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17968 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17978 \begin_layout Labeling
17979 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17981 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17982 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17996 \begin_inset space ~
18000 \begin_inset space ~
18006 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18014 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18018 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18022 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18026 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18030 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18033 quotation marks (as common, e.
18034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18037 g., in North Korea and China)
18041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18043 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18044 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18045 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18055 \begin_layout Standard
18057 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18059 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18063 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18065 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18072 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18073 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18074 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18075 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18083 does not necessarily mean
18084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18092 This is why we call them
18093 \begin_inset Quotes els
18097 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18118 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18119 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18121 \begin_inset Quotes els
18125 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18129 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18131 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18132 can be obtained by means of
18137 arg "quote-insert single"
18141 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18150 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18154 \begin_layout Standard
18156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18157 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18158 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18159 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18160 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18161 If you check the setting
18163 Use dynamic quotation marks
18167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18171 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18172 they appear in a special color).
18173 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18174 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18179 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18182 \begin_layout Standard
18184 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18185 Individual quotation marks (i.
18186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18189 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18190 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18196 \begin_layout Subsection
18198 \begin_inset Index idx
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 Typography ! Ligatures
18208 \begin_inset Index idx
18211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18242 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18250 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18251 print them as single characters.
18252 These groups are known as
18257 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18258 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18260 Here are the standard ligatures:
18263 \begin_layout Itemize
18267 \begin_layout Itemize
18271 \begin_layout Itemize
18275 \begin_layout Itemize
18279 \begin_layout Itemize
18283 \begin_layout Standard
18284 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18287 \begin_layout Standard
18288 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18289 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18313 To break a ligature, use
18315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18316 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18336 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18353 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 \begin_layout Subsection
18363 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18365 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18367 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18371 \begin_inset Index idx
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18384 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18391 \begin_layout Standard
18394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18395 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18399 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18402 \begin_layout Description
18404 The name of the game.
18407 \begin_layout Description
18409 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18413 \begin_layout Description
18415 The \SpecialChar TeX
18416 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18420 \begin_layout Description
18421 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18422 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18426 \begin_layout Standard
18427 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18433 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18441 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18442 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18443 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18444 converges to the number
18445 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18448 : The actual version is
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18457 , the previous one was
18458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18469 \begin_layout Subsection
18471 \begin_inset Index idx
18474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18483 \begin_layout Standard
18484 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18485 space between two words.
18486 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18496 for units use the menu
18498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18501 \begin_inset space ~
18509 arg "space-insert thin"
18515 \begin_layout Standard
18516 Here is an example to show the differences:
18519 \begin_layout Standard
18520 \begin_inset Tabular
18521 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18522 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18523 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18524 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18531 \begin_inset space ~
18535 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18547 space between number and unit
18554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18563 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 half space between number and unit
18588 \begin_layout Subsection
18590 \begin_inset Index idx
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18605 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18606 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18607 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18608 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18609 These bits of text became known as
18620 \begin_layout Standard
18621 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18622 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18623 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18624 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18625 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18626 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18627 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18628 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18629 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18630 \begin_inset Newline newline
18638 \begin_inset Newline newline
18646 \begin_inset Newline newline
18649 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18650 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18651 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18653 \begin_inset space ~
18657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18659 key "latexcompanion"
18664 \begin_inset space ~
18668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18674 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18675 's page break mechanism.
18678 \begin_layout Chapter
18679 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18682 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18689 \begin_layout Standard
18690 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18693 \begin_inset space ~
18699 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18702 \begin_layout Section
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18723 \begin_layout Standard
18725 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18728 \begin_layout Description
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18734 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18735 \begin_inset Newline newline
18739 \begin_inset Note Note
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18751 \begin_layout Description
18752 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18753 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18754 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18758 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18766 \begin_inset Newline newline
18770 \begin_inset Note Comment
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18783 \begin_layout Description
18785 \begin_inset space ~
18788 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18789 set in the document settings under
18791 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18799 \begin_inset Newline newline
18803 \begin_inset Newline newline
18807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18817 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18822 of a comment that appears in the output.
18828 \begin_inset Newline newline
18832 \begin_inset Newline newline
18835 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18839 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18851 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18854 \begin_layout Section
18856 \begin_inset Index idx
18859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18868 name "sec:Footnotes"
18875 \begin_layout Standard
18877 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18883 or the toolbar button
18886 arg "footnote-insert"
18898 \begin_inset Graphics
18899 filename clipart/footnote.png
18908 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18909 's representation of your footnote.
18919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18938 label, the box will
18942 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18943 Clicking on the box label again will close
18956 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18957 and click on the footnote
18972 \begin_layout Standard
18973 Here is an example footnote:
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18990 \begin_layout Standard
18991 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18992 position where the footnote box is placed.
18993 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18994 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18995 according to the document class.
18997 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18998 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19004 ey are described in the
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19015 \begin_layout Section
19017 \begin_inset Index idx
19020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19029 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19036 \begin_layout Standard
19037 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19039 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19043 \begin_inset space ~
19048 or the toolbar button
19051 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19077 appearing within your text.
19078 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19079 's representation of your margin
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19089 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19093 \begin_inset Marginal
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 This is a marginal note.
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19107 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19108 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19109 pages, right on odd pages.
19112 \begin_layout Standard
19113 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19124 \begin_inset space ~
19132 \begin_layout Section
19133 Graphics and Images
19134 \begin_inset Index idx
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 \begin_inset Index idx
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19156 name "sec:Graphics"
19163 \begin_layout Standard
19164 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19165 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19168 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19177 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19180 \begin_layout Standard
19181 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19186 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19187 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19189 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19190 \begin_inset space ~
19194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19196 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19203 \begin_layout Standard
19208 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19209 of the image in the output.
19210 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19218 \begin_inset space ~
19227 \begin_inset space ~
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19240 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19241 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19249 \begin_layout Standard
19253 \begin_inset space ~
19257 \begin_inset space ~
19262 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19263 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19265 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19275 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19276 with the image size is printed.
19279 \begin_layout Standard
19280 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19281 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19283 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19286 \begin_layout Standard
19288 \begin_inset Graphics
19289 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19297 \begin_layout Standard
19298 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19299 the image into a float, see section
19300 \begin_inset space ~
19304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19306 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19313 \begin_layout Subsection
19315 \begin_inset Index idx
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19327 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19334 \begin_layout Standard
19335 You can insert images in any known file format.
19336 But as we explained in section
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19343 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19347 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19349 therefore uses the program
19353 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19354 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19355 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19356 \begin_inset space ~
19360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19362 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19369 \begin_layout Standard
19370 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19373 \begin_layout Description
19375 \begin_inset space ~
19378 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19379 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19380 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19384 Graphics Interchange Format
19385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19388 (GIF, file extension
19389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19401 \begin_inset Index idx
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19436 Portable Network Graphics
19437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19440 (PNG, file extension
19441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19453 \begin_inset Index idx
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19488 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19492 (JPG, file extension
19493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19517 \begin_inset Index idx
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 \begin_layout Description
19553 \begin_inset space ~
19556 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19558 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19559 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19560 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19561 \begin_inset Newline newline
19564 Scalable image formats can be
19565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19568 Scalable Vector Graphics
19569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19572 (SVG, file extension
19573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19585 \begin_inset Index idx
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19620 Encapsulated PostScript
19621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19624 (EPS, file extension
19625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19637 \begin_inset Index idx
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19672 Portable Document Format
19673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19676 (PDF, file extension
19677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19689 \begin_inset Index idx
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19707 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19708 result will not be scalable.
19709 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19723 \begin_layout Standard
19724 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19731 \begin_layout Subsection
19732 Grouping of Image Settings
19733 \begin_inset Index idx
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 Images ! Settings grouping
19745 \begin_layout Standard
19746 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19748 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19749 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19751 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19752 need to manually change each of them.
19756 \begin_layout Standard
19757 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19760 \begin_inset space ~
19764 \begin_inset space ~
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19786 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19787 and checking the name of the desired group.
19790 \begin_layout Section
19792 \begin_inset Index idx
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19811 \begin_layout Standard
19812 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19815 arg "tabular-insert"
19820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19824 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19825 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19826 from the rest of the table.
19827 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19828 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19830 Here is an example table:
19833 \begin_layout Standard
19835 \begin_inset Tabular
19836 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19837 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19840 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19841 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 \begin_layout Subsection
20045 \begin_layout Standard
20046 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20049 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20053 This brings up the table dialog.
20054 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20055 cursor is placed currently.
20056 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20057 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20058 done on all of your selection.
20061 \begin_layout Standard
20062 In addition to the table dialog, the
20065 \begin_inset space ~
20070 helps you in setting table properties.
20071 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20074 \begin_layout Standard
20078 \begin_inset space ~
20083 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20084 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20085 current cell respectively.
20086 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20088 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20089 of text, see section
20090 \begin_inset space ~
20094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20096 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20103 \begin_layout Standard
20104 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20105 using the check box
20114 This will merge the cells to
20118 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20119 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20120 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20121 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20122 in the last row without the upper border:
20125 \begin_layout Standard
20127 \begin_inset Tabular
20128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20129 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20131 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 \begin_layout Standard
20265 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20266 -arguments for the table.
20267 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20268 explained in the chapter
20275 \begin_inset space ~
20281 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20282 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20283 but are visible in the output.
20286 \begin_layout Standard
20287 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 Most DVI-viewers are
20299 able to display rotations.
20307 \begin_layout Standard
20312 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20317 adds lines for all cell borders.
20320 \begin_layout Subsection
20322 \begin_inset Index idx
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 Tables ! Multi-page
20332 \begin_inset Index idx
20335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 \begin_layout Standard
20345 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20348 \begin_inset space ~
20352 \begin_inset space ~
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20365 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20366 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20369 \begin_layout Description
20374 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20375 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20376 Except for the first page, if
20379 \begin_inset space ~
20387 \begin_layout Description
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20396 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20397 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20400 \begin_layout Description
20405 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20406 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20407 except for the last page, if
20410 \begin_inset space ~
20418 \begin_layout Description
20422 \begin_inset space ~
20427 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20428 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20431 \begin_layout Description
20432 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20433 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20439 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20450 \begin_layout Standard
20451 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20452 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20453 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20459 In this context, first means first in this order:
20462 \begin_inset space ~
20474 \begin_inset space ~
20479 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20482 \begin_layout Standard
20484 \begin_inset Tabular
20485 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20486 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20487 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20488 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20489 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20490 <row endfirsthead="true">
20491 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20502 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <row endfirsthead="true">
20522 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <row endhead="true">
20555 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <row endhead="true">
20586 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <row endfoot="true">
20619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 <row endlastfoot="true">
22601 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 \begin_layout Subsection
22640 \begin_inset Index idx
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22652 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22659 \begin_layout Standard
22660 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22661 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22662 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22663 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22667 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22670 \begin_layout Standard
22671 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22672 for the column in the table dialog.
22673 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22674 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22678 \begin_layout Standard
22680 \begin_inset Tabular
22681 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22682 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22684 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 This is longer now.
22835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22887 This is longer now.
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 \begin_layout Standard
22919 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22920 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22926 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22932 Selection with the mouse or with
22936 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22937 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22938 the selection from outside the table.
22941 \begin_layout Section
22943 \begin_inset Index idx
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22962 \begin_layout Subsection
22966 \begin_layout Standard
22967 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22968 have a fixed location.
22970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22977 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22985 \begin_inset space ~
22990 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22991 too many notes on the current page.
22994 \begin_layout Standard
22995 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22996 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22997 and pages without text.
22998 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22999 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23000 Floats are therefore numbered.
23001 Referencing is described in section
23002 \begin_inset space ~
23006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23008 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23015 \begin_layout Standard
23016 To insert a float, use the menu
23018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23022 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23023 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23025 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23026 \begin_inset Index idx
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23036 paragraph within the float.
23037 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23038 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23039 left-clicking on the box label.
23040 A closed float box looks like this:
23041 \begin_inset Graphics
23042 filename clipart/float.png
23047 – a gray button with a red label.
23050 \begin_layout Standard
23051 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23053 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23056 \begin_layout Subsection
23058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23060 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23065 \begin_inset Index idx
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 Floats ! Figure floats
23077 \begin_layout Standard
23079 \begin_inset space ~
23083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23085 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23089 was created using the menu
23091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23092 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23098 arg "float-insert figure"
23102 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23111 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23115 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23116 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23120 \begin_inset space ~
23128 arg "layout-paragraph"
23134 \begin_layout Standard
23135 \begin_inset Float figure
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 \begin_inset Graphics
23143 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23158 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23162 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23175 \begin_layout Standard
23176 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23177 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23188 ) and refer to it using the menu
23190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23196 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23200 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23201 vague references like
23202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23209 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23210 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23220 For more about cross-references, see section
23221 \begin_inset space ~
23225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23227 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23234 \begin_layout Standard
23235 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23236 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23237 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23238 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23239 as described in section
23240 \begin_inset space ~
23244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23246 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23252 \begin_inset space ~
23256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23258 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23262 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23263 You can also set the images one below the other.
23265 \begin_inset space ~
23269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23271 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23278 reference "fig:Platypus"
23282 are the subfigures.
23285 \begin_layout Standard
23286 \begin_inset Float figure
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23296 \begin_inset Float figure
23301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23307 name "fig:Undefinable"
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 \begin_inset Graphics
23321 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23332 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23336 \begin_inset Float figure
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23342 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23347 name "fig:Platypus"
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 \begin_inset Graphics
23361 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23385 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23389 Two distorted images.
23402 \begin_layout Subsection
23404 \begin_inset Index idx
23407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 Floats ! Table floats
23416 \begin_layout Standard
23417 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23420 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23423 or the toolbar button
23426 arg "float-insert table"
23430 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23431 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23432 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23434 \begin_inset space ~
23438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23440 reference "tab:Table-float"
23447 \begin_layout Standard
23448 \begin_inset Float table
23453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23459 name "tab:Table-float"
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 \begin_inset Tabular
23474 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23475 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23476 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23478 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23629 \end{array}\right]$
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23671 \begin_layout Subsection
23673 \begin_inset Index idx
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 \begin_layout Standard
23687 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23688 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23689 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23691 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23699 \begin_inset space ~
23707 \begin_layout Section
23709 \begin_inset Index idx
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_layout Standard
23723 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23725 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23726 \begin_inset space \space{}
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23735 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23741 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23742 and its alignment within the page.
23745 \begin_layout Standard
23747 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23757 height_special "totalheight"
23762 backgroundcolor "none"
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 This is a minipage.
23769 The text is set in an italic style.
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23776 another formatting.
23784 \begin_layout Standard
23785 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23788 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23792 as described in section
23793 \begin_inset space ~
23797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23799 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23804 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23810 \begin_layout Standard
23811 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23821 height_special "totalheight"
23826 backgroundcolor "none"
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23831 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23837 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23841 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23851 height_special "totalheight"
23856 backgroundcolor "none"
23859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23860 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23861 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23869 \begin_layout Standard
23870 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23876 \begin_layout Standard
23877 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23879 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23886 \begin_inset space ~
23894 \begin_layout Chapter
23895 Mathematical Formulas
23896 \begin_inset Index idx
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset Index idx
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23940 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23947 \begin_layout Standard
23948 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23953 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23956 \begin_layout Section
23958 \begin_inset Index idx
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 \begin_layout Standard
23971 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23984 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23986 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23987 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23988 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23996 \begin_layout Standard
23997 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24001 \begin_inset space ~
24006 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24009 \begin_layout Standard
24010 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24011 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24014 \begin_layout Standard
24015 This is a line with an inline formula
24016 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24022 \begin_layout Standard
24023 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24024 paragraph, like this one:
24025 \begin_inset Formula
24032 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24035 \begin_layout Standard
24037 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24039 For example, typing
24040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24053 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24054 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24058 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24061 \begin_inset space ~
24069 \begin_layout Subsection
24070 Navigating in Formulas
24071 \begin_inset Index idx
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 \begin_layout Standard
24084 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24085 achieved with the arrow keys.
24087 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24088 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24093 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24094 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24098 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24102 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24105 \end{array}\right]$
24113 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24118 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24119 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24122 \begin_layout Standard
24127 , printed in this document as
24128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24132 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24139 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24140 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24141 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24146 For example, if you want
24147 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24155 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24165 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24169 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24174 , since in the latter case only the
24177 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24182 will be under the square root sign:
24183 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24189 \begin_layout Standard
24190 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24192 \begin_inset Formula
24194 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24203 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24204 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24207 \begin_layout Subsection
24211 \begin_layout Standard
24212 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24213 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24217 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24218 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24219 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24220 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24221 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24225 \begin_layout Subsection
24226 Exponents and Subscripts
24227 \begin_inset Index idx
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 \begin_inset Index idx
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 \begin_layout Standard
24250 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24253 arg "math-superscript"
24259 arg "math-subscript"
24262 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24264 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24267 , type in a formula
24270 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24280 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24286 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24290 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24296 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24302 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24311 , you have to use an extra
24315 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24316 For example, if you want
24317 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24323 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24329 Subscripts are similar: To get
24330 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24336 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24344 \begin_layout Subsection
24346 \begin_inset Index idx
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 \begin_layout Standard
24359 Create a fraction either with the command
24365 or by using the icon
24368 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24374 \begin_inset space ~
24380 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24381 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24382 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24387 To move back up, press
24392 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24393 \begin_inset Formula
24395 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24398 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24406 \begin_layout Subsection
24408 \begin_inset Index idx
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 \begin_layout Standard
24421 Roots can be created using the
24424 \begin_inset space ~
24432 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24438 arg "math-insert \\root"
24460 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24466 always produces a square root.
24469 \begin_layout Subsection
24470 Operators with Limits
24471 \begin_inset Index idx
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 \begin_inset Index idx
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24493 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24500 \begin_layout Standard
24502 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24506 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24509 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24510 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24511 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24512 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24513 The sum operator will automatically place its
24514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24521 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24523 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24527 \begin_inset Formula
24529 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24534 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24538 \begin_layout Standard
24539 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24541 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24542 behind the operator and using the menu
24544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24545 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24551 \begin_inset space ~
24565 \begin_layout Standard
24566 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24575 \begin_inset Index idx
24578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 \begin_inset Formula
24587 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24592 which will place the
24593 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24605 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24606 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24612 \begin_layout Standard
24613 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24620 Have a look at section
24621 \begin_inset space ~
24625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24627 reference "subsec:Functions"
24631 for an explanation of function macros.
24634 \begin_layout Subsection
24636 \begin_inset Index idx
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 \begin_layout Standard
24649 Most math symbols can be found in the
24652 \begin_inset space ~
24657 under one of several categories; including
24674 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24678 \begin_layout Standard
24679 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24680 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24681 don't have to use the
24684 \begin_inset space ~
24689 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24691 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24694 \begin_layout Subsection
24696 \begin_inset Index idx
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24708 \begin_layout Standard
24709 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24715 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24721 \begin_inset space ~
24729 arg "math-insert \\space"
24733 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24734 For example, the sequence
24739 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24742 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24744 \begin_inset Graphics
24745 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24750 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24751 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24752 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24753 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24754 , because they are negative
24756 Here are two examples:
24759 \begin_layout Standard
24769 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24775 \begin_layout Standard
24785 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24791 \begin_layout Subsection
24793 \begin_inset Index idx
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24805 name "subsec:Functions"
24812 \begin_layout Standard
24816 \begin_inset space ~
24821 contains under the button
24824 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24827 a number of function macros, such as
24828 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24832 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24840 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24847 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24848 avoid confusions, because
24849 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24853 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24859 \begin_layout Standard
24860 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24862 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24866 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24872 \begin_layout Standard
24873 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24874 are placed, as described in section
24875 \begin_inset space ~
24879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24881 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24888 \begin_layout Subsection
24890 \begin_inset Index idx
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 \begin_layout Standard
24903 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24905 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24906 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24907 commands, for example, to enter
24908 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24911 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24912 Our example is entered by typing
24917 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24924 \begin_inset space ~
24928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24930 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24934 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24937 \begin_layout Standard
24938 \begin_inset Float table
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24944 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24949 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24953 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset Tabular
24964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24965 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25106 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25160 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25430 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25484 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25550 \begin_layout Standard
25551 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25554 \begin_inset space ~
25562 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25565 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25569 \begin_layout Section
25570 Brackets and Delimiters
25571 \begin_inset Index idx
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 \begin_inset Index idx
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25593 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25600 \begin_layout Standard
25601 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25603 For some purposes, using just the keys
25608 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25609 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25610 toolbar delimiter icon
25613 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25617 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25618 \begin_inset Formula
25620 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25628 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25629 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25633 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25636 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25642 \begin_inset Formula
25644 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25652 \begin_layout Standard
25653 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25654 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25658 \begin_layout Standard
25659 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25660 left side and right side.
25661 If you use the option
25664 \begin_inset space ~
25669 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25670 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25672 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25677 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25678 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25681 \begin_layout Standard
25682 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25683 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25684 is to go inside the brackets.
25685 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25690 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25691 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25692 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25696 arg "math-delim ( )"
25702 \begin_layout Section
25703 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25704 \begin_inset Index idx
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 \begin_inset Index idx
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25724 \begin_inset Index idx
25727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25728 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25736 \begin_layout Standard
25737 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25741 \begin_inset space ~
25749 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25753 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25754 Here is an example:
25755 \begin_inset Formula
25757 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25766 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25767 \begin_inset space ~
25771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25773 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25778 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25779 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25780 This alignment is set in the box
25785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25834 for every column as default.
25835 For example, the sequence
25836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25847 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25848 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25849 corresponds to the relevant column.
25850 The result will look like this:
25851 \begin_inset Formula
25854 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25855 column & has & has\,right\\
25856 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25869 arg "newline-insert newline"
25872 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25873 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25878 or the math toolbar.
25881 \begin_layout Standard
25882 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25883 It can be created with the menu
25885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25886 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25888 \begin_inset space ~
25900 Here is an example:
25901 \begin_inset Formula
25915 \begin_layout Standard
25916 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25919 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25922 arg "newline-insert newline"
25926 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25931 arg "newline-insert newline"
25934 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25942 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25943 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25944 A new row is created by every further entry of
25947 arg "newline-insert newline"
25951 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25952 Here is an example:
25953 \begin_inset Formula
25955 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25956 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25961 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25962 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25963 \begin_inset Formula
25965 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25973 \begin_layout Standard
25974 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25981 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25982 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25985 reference "eq:asquared"
25990 The other types are described in section
25991 \begin_inset space ~
25995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25997 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26004 \begin_layout Section
26005 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26006 \begin_inset Index idx
26009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26010 Math ! Formula numbering
26016 \begin_inset Index idx
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26020 Math ! Referencing formulas
26026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26028 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26038 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26039 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26041 \begin_inset space ~
26045 \begin_inset space ~
26053 arg "math-number-toggle"
26057 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26058 within parentheses.
26059 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26060 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26061 the document class.
26062 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26063 separated by a dot:
26064 \begin_inset Formula
26074 arg "math-number-toggle"
26077 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26078 You can only number displayed formulas.
26081 \begin_layout Standard
26082 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26085 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26087 \begin_inset space ~
26091 \begin_inset space ~
26099 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26102 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26103 \begin_inset Formula
26106 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26112 To number all lines use the shortcut
26115 arg "math-number-toggle"
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26122 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26125 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26126 A label is inserted with the menu
26128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26137 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26138 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26139 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26151 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26152 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26153 We inserted in the following example the label
26154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26161 in the second line:
26162 \begin_inset Formula
26164 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26165 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26170 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26171 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26172 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26176 \begin_inset space ~
26184 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26188 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26189 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26190 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26191 as the formula number:
26194 \begin_layout Standard
26195 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26198 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26205 \begin_layout Standard
26206 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26207 's cross-reference box are described in section
26208 \begin_inset space ~
26212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26214 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26219 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26227 \begin_layout Section
26228 User defined math macros
26229 \begin_inset Index idx
26232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26243 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26244 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26245 Math macros are explained in section
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26260 \begin_layout Section
26264 \begin_layout Subsection
26266 \begin_inset Index idx
26269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26278 \begin_layout Standard
26279 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26280 To set a font in a formula, use the
26283 \begin_inset space ~
26291 arg "math-insert \\font"
26294 , or enter its command, listed in table
26295 \begin_inset space ~
26299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26301 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26309 \begin_inset Float table
26314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26320 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26324 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26334 \begin_inset Tabular
26335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26336 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26370 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26457 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26484 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26545 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26606 \begin_layout Standard
26607 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26631 \begin_layout Standard
26632 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26633 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26638 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26639 space when you need a space in the box.
26640 Here is an example where
26641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26652 denotes the set of numbers:
26653 \begin_inset Formula
26655 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26663 \begin_layout Standard
26664 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26665 You can, for example, put a character in
26674 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26678 \begin_inset Newline newline
26681 So it is better not to use this feature.
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26686 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26690 \begin_inset Newline newline
26693 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26699 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26700 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26706 \begin_layout Standard
26713 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26717 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26719 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26720 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26722 \begin_inset space ~
26730 \begin_layout Subsection
26732 \begin_inset Index idx
26735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 \begin_layout Standard
26745 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26747 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26751 \begin_inset space ~
26755 \begin_inset space ~
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26771 arg "math-insert \\font"
26775 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26776 in black instead of blue.
26777 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26778 Here is an example:
26779 \begin_inset Formula
26782 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26783 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26792 \begin_layout Subsection
26794 \begin_inset Index idx
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 \begin_layout Standard
26807 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26808 automatically chosen in most situations.
26826 For most characters,
26834 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26835 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26840 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26841 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26842 thinks are appropriate.
26843 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26846 arg "math-insert \\style"
26850 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26851 For example, you can set
26852 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26855 , which is normally in
26864 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26868 The four styles are used in the following example:
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26876 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26880 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26884 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26890 \begin_layout Standard
26891 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26892 is set in a particular size with the menu
26894 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26896 \begin_inset space ~
26901 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26902 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26903 will be adjusted to correspond.
26904 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26915 \begin_layout Standard
26919 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26925 \begin_layout Section
26926 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26928 \begin_inset Index idx
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26938 \begin_inset Index idx
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26950 \begin_layout Standard
26952 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26953 that are in common use.
26956 \begin_layout Subsection
26957 Enabling AMS-Support
26960 \begin_layout Standard
26961 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26962 the document by selecting the checkbox
26965 \begin_inset space ~
26969 \begin_inset space ~
26973 \begin_inset space ~
26980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26984 \begin_inset Index idx
26987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26988 Document ! Settings
26996 \begin_inset space ~
27002 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27003 -errors in formulas,
27004 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27007 \begin_layout Subsection
27009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27011 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27016 \begin_inset Index idx
27019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27028 \begin_layout Standard
27029 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27030 provides a selection of different formula types.
27032 allows you to choose between
27053 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27060 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27063 \begin_layout Chapter
27067 \begin_layout Section
27069 \begin_inset Index idx
27072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27081 name "sec:Cross-References"
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27090 's strengths is cross-references.
27091 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27093 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27094 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27095 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27098 \begin_layout Enumerate
27102 \begin_layout Enumerate
27103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27105 name "enu:Second-item"
27112 \begin_layout Enumerate
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27117 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27122 or by pressing the toolbar button
27129 A gray label box like this:
27130 \begin_inset Graphics
27131 filename clipart/label.png
27135 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27137 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27172 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27173 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27195 or the toolbar button
27198 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27202 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27203 \begin_inset Graphics
27204 filename clipart/reference.png
27208 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27210 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27223 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 As an alternative to
27230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27233 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27238 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27239 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27254 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27255 \begin_inset space ~
27259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27261 reference "enu:Second-item"
27268 \begin_layout Standard
27269 It is recommended to use a protected space
27273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27274 described in section
27275 \begin_inset space ~
27279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27281 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27290 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27291 line breaks between them.
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27295 There are six formats of cross-references:
27298 \begin_layout Description
27299 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27302 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27309 \begin_layout Description
27310 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27311 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27323 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27330 \begin_layout Description
27331 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27332 \begin_inset space ~
27336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27337 LatexCommand pageref
27338 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27345 \begin_layout Description
27347 \begin_inset space ~
27351 \begin_inset space ~
27354 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27356 LatexCommand vpageref
27357 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27362 \begin_inset Newline newline
27365 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27366 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27367 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27368 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27369 it prints “on the next page”.
27370 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27373 \begin_layout Description
27375 \begin_inset space ~
27379 \begin_inset space ~
27383 \begin_inset space ~
27386 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27389 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27394 \begin_inset Newline newline
27397 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27403 ; otherwise it behaves like
27407 \begin_inset space ~
27411 \begin_inset space ~
27420 \begin_layout Description
27422 \begin_inset space ~
27425 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27426 \begin_inset Newline newline
27430 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27438 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27448 \begin_inset Index idx
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27453 -packages ! prettyref
27459 \begin_inset Index idx
27462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27464 -packages ! refstyle
27475 \begin_inset Newline newline
27478 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27479 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27482 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 is the default and preferred because
27499 supports only English documents.
27500 The format is specified by using the command
27512 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27513 preamble of the document.
27514 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27528 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414614
27532 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414616
27536 \begin_inset Newline newline
27543 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27548 \begin_inset Newline newline
27551 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
27553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27555 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27560 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414624
27562 \begin_inset Newline newline
27565 The `Plural' and `Capitalized' options will be available with formatted
27566 references only if you are using the
27571 See its documentation, again, for more information.
27574 \begin_layout Description
27576 \begin_inset space ~
27579 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27581 LatexCommand nameref
27582 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27587 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414460
27591 \begin_layout Description
27593 \change_inserted 424524441 1483817846
27595 \begin_inset space ~
27598 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27599 label for the reference.
27600 This allows for customization, using ERT, if you want to issue a command
27601 that LyX does not support.
27606 , then you may want to use the
27607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27614 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27624 This is the form needed for, e.g.,
27629 \change_deleted 424524441 1483414539
27633 \begin_layout Standard
27634 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27635 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27637 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27641 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27645 \begin_layout Standard
27646 You can only use the style
27650 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27654 is always possible.
27657 \begin_layout Standard
27658 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27659 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27661 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27662 \begin_inset space ~
27666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27668 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27675 \begin_layout Standard
27676 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27680 \begin_inset space ~
27684 \begin_inset space ~
27689 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27690 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27693 \begin_inset space ~
27698 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27699 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27702 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27708 \begin_layout Standard
27709 You can change labels at any time.
27710 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27711 do not need to think about this.
27714 \begin_layout Standard
27715 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27717 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27722 References are described in detail in the section
27723 \begin_inset space ~
27733 \begin_inset space ~
27739 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27743 \begin_layout Standard
27745 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27746 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27751 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27756 It is recommended to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27762 \begin_inset Index idx
27765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27767 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27769 -packages ! refstyle
27779 \begin_inset Index idx
27782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27784 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27786 -packages ! prettyref
27791 does not know all of \SpecialChar LyX
27792 's possible label shortcuts
27796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27798 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27806 is for example \SpecialChar LyX
27807 's shortcut for labels in figure captions.
27812 and is not internationalized.
27822 \begin_layout Section
27823 Table of Contents and other Listings
27824 \begin_inset Index idx
27827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27834 \begin_inset Index idx
27837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 Navigating ! Outline
27844 \begin_inset Index idx
27847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27863 \begin_layout Subsection
27865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27867 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27874 \begin_layout Standard
27875 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27878 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27880 \begin_inset space ~
27884 \begin_inset space ~
27890 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27892 If you click on it, the
27896 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27897 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27898 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27900 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27902 \begin_inset space ~
27907 that is described in section
27908 \begin_inset space ~
27912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27914 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27922 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27923 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27925 \begin_inset space ~
27929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27931 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27935 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27937 \begin_inset space ~
27941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27943 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27947 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27949 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27952 \begin_layout Subsection
27953 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27956 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27963 \begin_layout Standard
27964 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27966 You can insert them via the
27968 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27972 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27975 \begin_layout Section
27976 URLs and Hyperlinks
27977 \begin_inset Index idx
27980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27987 \begin_inset Index idx
27990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27999 \begin_layout Subsection
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28019 \begin_layout Standard
28020 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28022 \begin_inset Flex URL
28025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28035 \begin_layout Standard
28036 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28042 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28046 \begin_layout Standard
28047 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28055 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28064 \begin_layout Subsection
28066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28068 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28075 \begin_layout Standard
28076 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28081 or with the toolbar button
28088 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28097 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28098 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28101 name "LyX's homepage"
28102 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28106 , an Email address like this:
28107 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28109 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28110 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28115 , or a link to a file.
28118 \begin_layout Standard
28119 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28132 to the link target.
28135 \begin_layout Standard
28136 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28137 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28138 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28139 the text style dialog.
28140 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28144 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28146 name "LyX's homepage"
28147 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28154 \begin_layout Standard
28155 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28159 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28162 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28166 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28168 \begin_inset Newline newline
28176 \begin_inset Newline newline
28183 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28186 \begin_layout Section
28188 \begin_inset Index idx
28191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28200 name "sec:Appendices"
28207 \begin_layout Standard
28208 Appendices are created with the menu
28210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28212 \begin_inset space ~
28216 \begin_inset space ~
28222 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28223 as the appendix part of the book.
28224 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28227 \begin_layout Standard
28228 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28229 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28230 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28231 and the subsection number.
28232 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28236 \begin_layout Standard
28238 \begin_inset space ~
28242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28244 reference "chap:Credits"
28249 \begin_inset space ~
28253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28255 reference "subsec:Export"
28262 \begin_layout Section
28264 \begin_inset Index idx
28267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28276 name "sec:Bibliography"
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28284 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28286 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880152
28288 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880151
28292 You can include a bibliography database,
28293 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880276
28298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28299 Known under the name
28300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28303 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28315 which is explained in
28316 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28317 the next subsection
28318 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890955
28320 \begin_inset space ~
28324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28326 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28335 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28341 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28343 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883190
28347 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883197
28351 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890942
28355 \begin_inset space ~
28359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28361 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28366 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883212
28370 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28372 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28374 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28377 author-year citations,
28378 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28379 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28382 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28384 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28385 should seriously consider
28392 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28394 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28397 a bibliography database.
28398 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28402 \begin_layout Standard
28404 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28405 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28406 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28410 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28411 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28412 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28413 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28414 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28419 \begin_layout Subsection
28421 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885645
28422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28424 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28430 The Bibliography Environment
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28438 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28440 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28449 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28452 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28453 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28454 of ASCII characters only.
28457 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28467 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28468 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28472 \begin_layout Standard
28473 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28478 or the toolbar button
28481 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28485 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28486 containing the available citations.
28487 Select one or more keys from the list and
28497 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28498 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28502 \begin_layout Standard
28503 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28504 entry with surrounding brackets.
28509 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28510 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28522 \begin_layout Standard
28526 Companion Second Edition
28529 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28531 key "latexcompanion"
28538 \begin_layout Standard
28539 The \SpecialChar LyX
28540 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28541 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28548 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28552 \begin_layout Standard
28554 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28555 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28560 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28572 Author A and Author B(Year)
28573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28580 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28582 Then, if you select
28588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28592 \begin_inset Index idx
28595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28597 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28598 Document ! Settings
28605 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28611 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28618 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28624 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28627 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28629 \begin_inset space ~
28637 arg "layout-paragraph"
28641 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28644 \begin_layout Subsection
28645 Bibliography databases
28646 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28647 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28651 \begin_inset Index idx
28654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28655 Bibliography ! Databases
28661 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28663 \begin_inset Index idx
28666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28667 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28678 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28685 \begin_layout Standard
28686 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28687 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28689 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28692 in different documents.
28696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28697 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28699 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28700 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28705 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28707 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28708 your working field in a database.
28709 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28710 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28711 list for that document.
28712 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28716 \begin_layout Standard
28717 The database is a text file with the file extension
28718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28729 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28730 The format is explained in
28731 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28737 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28739 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28741 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28746 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28747 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28748 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28750 \begin_inset Flex URL
28753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28755 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28761 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28765 \begin_layout Standard
28767 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28769 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28770 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28771 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28773 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28774 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28775 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28777 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28786 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28787 (although it has been significantly
28788 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28795 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28800 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28801 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28802 might conversely fail to correctly
28803 handle databases that use specific
28814 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28818 \begin_layout Standard
28820 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28821 Both approaches are described in turn.
28824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28826 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28827 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28829 \begin_inset Index idx
28832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28834 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28835 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28846 \begin_layout Standard
28848 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28850 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28854 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28855 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28865 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28867 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28871 \begin_inset space ~
28877 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28878 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28879 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28880 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28890 Add bibliography to TOC
28892 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28897 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28898 in the document or just the cited references.
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28903 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28904 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28907 style file is a text file with the file extension
28908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28919 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28920 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28921 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28922 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28924 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28930 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28931 \begin_inset Newline newline
28935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28937 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28947 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28948 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28953 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28959 \begin_layout Standard
28960 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28961 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
28965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28967 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
28969 \begin_inset Index idx
28972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28974 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
28975 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28983 \begin_layout Standard
28985 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
28986 Accessing a database via
28990 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28998 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29000 \begin_inset space ~
29006 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
29007 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29009 you cannot select a
29013 file (we will explain later, why).
29014 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29017 Add bibliography to TOC
29019 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29024 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29025 in the document or just the cited references.
29028 \begin_layout Standard
29030 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
29035 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
29037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29048 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
29050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29061 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29062 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
29063 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
29064 bibliography style.
29067 \begin_layout Standard
29069 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29074 styles are not set in the
29077 \begin_inset space ~
29088 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29089 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29093 However, in the former dialog (in the
29097 field which is only visible if you use
29101 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29102 (for instance concerning its heading).
29103 These options are detailed in the
29108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29119 \begin_layout Standard
29121 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29122 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29123 \begin_inset space ~
29127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29129 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29141 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29142 Bibliography Processors
29145 \begin_layout Standard
29146 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29148 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29149 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29150 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29155 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29157 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29161 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29167 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29168 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29172 \begin_layout Standard
29174 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29175 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29177 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29178 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29179 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29184 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29185 do this on a general level in
29187 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29188 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29189 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29192 , or for individual documents
29193 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29194 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29204 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29206 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29211 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29212 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29213 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29219 The following variants are
29220 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29222 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29223 available by default
29228 \begin_layout Description
29230 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29231 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29235 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29243 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29244 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29245 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29250 \begin_inset space \space{}
29257 ), only with the package
29260 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29263 and many specific features
29270 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29271 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29273 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29278 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29287 \begin_layout Description
29288 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29289 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29290 with all bibliography packages,
29291 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29293 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29297 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29298 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29299 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29301 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29307 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29310 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29315 \begin_layout Description
29316 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29317 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29318 (but no Unicode support)
29320 , larger memory than
29324 , works with all bibliography packages
29325 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29326 , although more complex
29330 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29334 features are supported.
29337 \begin_layout Standard
29339 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29348 bibliography processor set in
29350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29351 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29362 bibliography processor in
29364 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29365 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29366 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29369 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29370 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29379 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29380 -based bibliography styles).
29381 This should suit most needs.
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29388 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29389 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29390 By default, this is
29398 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29399 You can adjust it in
29401 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29402 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29403 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29411 \begin_layout Standard
29413 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29414 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29416 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29417 Selected bibliography processors
29419 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29420 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29421 specification of the variants
29422 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29426 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29428 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29432 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29435 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29437 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29443 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29445 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29452 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29464 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29470 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29476 \begin_layout Standard
29478 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29480 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29483 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29484 When you select the option
29486 Sectioned bibliography
29490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29491 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29494 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29498 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29500 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29504 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29508 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29511 are explained in detail in section
29513 Customizing Bibliographies
29517 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29522 Additional Features
29527 \begin_layout Standard
29529 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29530 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29531 the two methods of creating them.
29532 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29533 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29534 We used the style file
29538 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29543 \begin_layout Subsection
29545 \begin_inset Index idx
29548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29549 Bibliography ! Citation format
29555 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29559 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29568 \begin_layout Standard
29570 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29571 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29576 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29585 ) or author-year citations (as
29586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29595 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29601 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29602 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29605 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29609 \begin_inset Index idx
29612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29614 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29615 Document ! Settings
29622 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29625 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29626 bibliography approach.
29629 \begin_layout Standard
29631 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29636 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29641 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29645 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29652 \begin_layout Standard
29654 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29655 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29663 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29671 Currently, the following options are available:
29674 \begin_layout Itemize
29676 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29683 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29687 \begin_layout Itemize
29689 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29698 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29700 Biblatex citation style
29704 Biblatex bibliography style
29707 Many different style variants are supported.
29712 package can be entered in the
29719 \begin_layout Itemize
29721 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29724 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29734 natbib compatibility mode
29735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29739 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29744 (see below) or want to emulate
29748 behavior very closely.
29753 , this option has some additional styles.
29754 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29759 styles are also supported by this variant.
29762 \begin_layout Itemize
29764 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29773 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29776 \begin_layout Itemize
29778 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29787 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29794 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29803 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29805 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29810 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29812 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29813 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29830 , a suitable style is proposed).
29835 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29839 \begin_layout Standard
29841 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29842 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29844 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29846 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29849 n the citation reference dialog
29850 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29851 you can set a special citation format
29855 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29856 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29857 a name prefix such as
29858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29873 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29877 e., use or don't use
29878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29887 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29888 For this feature you need to enable the option
29894 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29898 \begin_inset Index idx
29901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29902 Document ! Settings
29912 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29913 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29914 style files as explained in
29915 the previous section.
29920 \begin_layout Standard
29922 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29923 In the citation dialog,
29924 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29926 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29929 ou can also set text to appear
29930 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29933 after a citation reference,
29934 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29935 in the citation reference window
29936 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29942 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29960 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
29962 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
29965 example where the text
29966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29970 \begin_inset space ~
29974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29977 appears after the reference:
29980 \begin_layout Quote
29982 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29985 key "latexcompanion"
29990 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
29994 \begin_layout Standard
29996 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891777
29997 All styles except for
30001 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
30002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30010 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30016 \begin_layout Section
30018 \begin_inset Index idx
30021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30037 \begin_layout Standard
30038 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30042 \begin_inset space ~
30047 or the toolbar button
30054 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30055 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30056 by \SpecialChar LyX
30057 as the index entry.
30060 \begin_layout Standard
30061 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30064 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30066 \begin_inset space ~
30072 A light blue box labeled
30073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30084 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30085 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30089 \begin_layout Standard
30090 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30091 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30092 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30093 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30095 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30097 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30104 \begin_layout Subsection
30105 Grouping Index Entries
30106 \begin_inset Index idx
30109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30119 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30121 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30122 lists under the entry
30123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30131 First we create the entry
30132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30140 \begin_inset space ~
30144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30146 reference "subsec:Lists"
30151 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30152 \begin_inset space ~
30156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30158 reference "sec:Itemize"
30162 , we insert the command
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30171 \begin_layout Standard
30175 \begin_layout Standard
30181 \begin_layout Standard
30182 for the enumerated list in section
30183 \begin_inset space ~
30187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30189 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30196 \begin_layout Standard
30197 The exclamation mark
30198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30205 marks the grouping levels.
30206 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30207 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30208 If we don't have an index entry for
30209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30216 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30219 \begin_layout Subsection
30221 \begin_inset Index idx
30224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30225 Index ! Page ranges
30233 \begin_layout Standard
30234 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30236 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30237 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30238 an index entry in section
30239 \begin_inset space ~
30243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30245 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30255 Paragraph environments|(
30258 \begin_layout Standard
30259 and another entry at the end of section
30260 \begin_inset space ~
30264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30266 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30273 \begin_layout Standard
30276 Paragraph environments|)
30279 \begin_layout Standard
30281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30304 respectively start and end the index range.
30305 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30306 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30307 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30308 An example is the index entry
30309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30312 Document ! Settings
30313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30319 \begin_layout Subsection
30321 \begin_inset Index idx
30324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30325 Index ! Cross referencing
30333 \begin_layout Standard
30334 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30335 We referred for example in the index entry
30336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30344 \begin_inset space ~
30348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30350 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30354 ) to the index entry
30355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30362 in the same section using the entry
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30368 GIF|see{Image formats}
30371 \begin_layout Standard
30372 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30374 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30375 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30378 \begin_layout Subsection
30380 \begin_inset Index idx
30383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30384 Index ! Entry order
30392 \begin_layout Standard
30393 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30394 follow the rules for the index order.
30395 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30401 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30403 \begin_inset space ~
30407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30409 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30418 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30419 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30444 \begin_inset Index idx
30447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30448 Dummy entries ! maïs
30454 \begin_inset Index idx
30457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30458 Dummy entries ! maître
30464 \begin_inset Index idx
30467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30468 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30473 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30474 maïs, maison, maître.
30475 To achieve this, we use the command
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30481 previous entry@current entry
30484 \begin_layout Standard
30485 In our case we want to have
30486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30501 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30510 \begin_layout Standard
30511 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30512 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30514 See the next subsection for an example.
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30530 to generate the index (see section
30531 \begin_inset space ~
30535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30537 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30546 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30547 -package aeguill in section
30548 \begin_inset space ~
30552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30554 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30558 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30559 -packages although all these index
30560 commands start with
30561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30574 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30579 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30582 \begin_layout Standard
30594 \begin_layout Standard
30606 \begin_layout Subsection
30608 \begin_inset Index idx
30611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 Index ! Entry layout
30620 \begin_layout Standard
30621 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30622 \begin_inset Index idx
30625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30628 This is an italic dummy entry
30633 You can also format the page number using the character
30634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30641 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30642 -command without a backslash.
30643 We can write for example
30646 \begin_layout Standard
30649 italic page number:|textit
30652 \begin_layout Standard
30653 to get the page number in italic.
30654 \begin_inset Index idx
30657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30663 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30664 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30682 \begin_inset space ~
30688 Have a look at section
30689 \begin_inset space ~
30693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30695 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30699 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30703 \begin_layout Standard
30704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30712 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30716 to generate the index, see section
30717 \begin_inset space ~
30721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30723 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30732 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30737 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30738 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30741 key "latexcompanion"
30753 \begin_layout Standard
30754 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30756 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30757 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30758 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30759 If so, put the following in the preamble
30762 \begin_layout Standard
30774 \begin_layout Standard
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30784 \begin_layout Standard
30785 in the index entry.
30786 \begin_inset Index idx
30789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30790 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30795 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30796 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30797 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30800 \begin_layout Standard
30801 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30802 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30803 a bold font for all index entries.
30804 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30816 documentation for details,
30817 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30819 key "makeindex,xindy"
30826 \begin_layout Subsection
30828 \begin_inset Index idx
30831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30840 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30847 \begin_layout Standard
30848 If the index generation program
30852 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30853 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30857 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30858 distribution, is used.
30862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30867 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30868 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30869 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30870 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30871 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30881 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30883 dialog, see section
30884 \begin_inset space ~
30888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30890 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30895 The available options are listed and explained in
30896 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30898 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30903 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30907 \begin_layout Standard
30908 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30909 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30913 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30917 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30918 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30921 \begin_layout Subsection
30925 \begin_layout Standard
30926 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30927 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30935 next to the standard index.
30937 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30938 that add this feature.
30945 \begin_inset Index idx
30948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30950 -packages ! splitidx
30955 package to generate multiple indexes.
30956 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30962 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30964 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30971 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30972 style, but it also includes
30973 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30974 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30982 \begin_layout Standard
30983 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30984 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30990 and select the option
30992 Use multiple Indexes
30999 already contains the standard index
31000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31008 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31009 also appear as a heading) to the
31013 input field and press the
31018 The new index now also appears in the list.
31019 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31020 label color to the new index.
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31024 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31034 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31035 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31036 are additional features:
31039 \begin_layout Itemize
31040 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31041 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31044 \begin_layout Itemize
31045 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31046 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31054 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31055 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31056 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31057 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31060 \begin_layout Section
31061 Nomenclature/Glossary
31062 \begin_inset Index idx
31065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31072 \begin_inset Index idx
31075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31106 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31113 \begin_layout Standard
31114 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31115 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31116 called nomenclature or glossary.
31119 \begin_layout Standard
31120 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31127 \begin_inset Index idx
31130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31132 -packages ! nomencl
31138 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31146 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31150 \begin_layout Standard
31151 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31152 and then use the menu
31154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31160 \begin_inset space ~
31165 or the toolbar button
31168 arg "nomencl-insert"
31173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31184 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31187 \begin_layout Standard
31188 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31189 The first is the term or
31193 that you wish to define.
31198 of the term or symbol.
31201 \begin_layout Standard
31202 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31210 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31211 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31219 \begin_layout Subsection
31220 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31221 \begin_inset Index idx
31224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31225 Nomenclature ! Layout
31233 \begin_layout Standard
31234 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31238 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31245 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31253 \begin_inset Newline newline
31261 \begin_inset Newline newline
31267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31274 character starts/ends the formula.
31275 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31276 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31288 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31299 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31300 -syntax is given in section
31301 \begin_inset space ~
31305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31307 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31314 \begin_layout Standard
31318 \begin_inset space ~
31323 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31325 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31330 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31337 in this document is:
31338 \begin_inset Newline newline
31343 dummy entry for the character
31348 \begin_inset Newline newline
31360 \begin_inset space ~
31370 font use the command
31399 \begin_layout Standard
31400 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31405 \begin_inset space \space{}
31409 \begin_inset Newline newline
31425 \begin_inset Newline newline
31428 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31429 This command will make the font of all symbols
31436 \begin_inset space ~
31444 \begin_layout Standard
31445 If the characters |
31446 \begin_inset space \space{}
31450 \begin_inset space \space{}
31454 \begin_inset space \space{}
31458 \begin_inset space \space{}
31462 \begin_inset space \space{}
31465 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31466 a quote character in front of them.
31467 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31468 LatexCommand nomenclature
31469 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31470 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31477 \begin_layout Subsection
31478 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31479 \begin_inset Index idx
31482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31483 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31491 \begin_layout Standard
31492 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31493 -code of the symbol
31495 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31497 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31501 LatexCommand nomenclature
31503 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31510 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31514 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31515 LatexCommand nomenclature
31518 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31523 They will be sorted by
31524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31550 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31553 will be sorted before the
31557 since the character
31558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31565 is considered in sorting.
31568 \begin_layout Standard
31569 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31572 \begin_inset space ~
31577 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31578 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31580 For the example given, you can insert
31584 in this field for the
31585 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31592 will be located before
31593 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31599 \begin_layout Standard
31600 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31605 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31614 \begin_layout Subsection
31615 Nomenclature Options
31616 \begin_inset Index idx
31619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31620 Nomenclature ! Options
31628 \begin_layout Standard
31633 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31634 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31637 \begin_layout Description
31638 refeq Appends the phrase
31639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31654 to every nomenclature entry, where
31660 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31663 \begin_layout Description
31664 refpage Appends the phrase
31665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31680 to every nomenclature entry, where
31686 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31689 \begin_layout Description
31690 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31693 \begin_layout Standard
31694 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31695 class options list in the
31697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31701 In this document the options
31708 \begin_layout Standard
31709 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31715 \begin_layout Standard
31716 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31717 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31722 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31725 \begin_layout Description
31735 \begin_layout Description
31738 nomrefpage Like the
31745 \begin_layout Description
31748 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31757 \begin_layout Description
31761 \begin_inset space ~
31767 \begin_inset space ~
31772 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31784 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31785 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31789 \begin_layout Standard
31797 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31800 \begin_inset Newline newline
31807 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31812 \begin_inset Newline newline
31816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31831 by their translation.
31834 \begin_layout Subsection
31835 Printing the Nomenclature
31836 \begin_inset Index idx
31839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31840 Nomenclature ! Printing
31848 \begin_layout Standard
31849 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31852 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31868 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31869 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31870 You can choose between these settings:
31873 \begin_layout Description
31874 Default a space of 1
31875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31881 \begin_layout Description
31883 \begin_inset space ~
31887 \begin_inset space ~
31890 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31893 \begin_layout Description
31894 Custom custom space
31897 \begin_layout Standard
31898 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31907 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31915 For example, in order to change the name to
31919 , add the following line to the preamble:
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31930 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31933 \begin_layout Subsection
31934 Nomenclature Program
31935 \begin_inset Index idx
31938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31939 Nomenclature ! Program
31945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31947 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31954 \begin_layout Standard
31960 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31961 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31963 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31968 by adding options, see section
31969 \begin_inset space ~
31973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31975 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31980 The available options are listed and explained in
31981 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31983 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31990 \begin_layout Section
31992 \begin_inset Index idx
31995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32002 \begin_inset Index idx
32005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32006 Document ! Branches
32012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32014 name "sec:Branches"
32021 \begin_layout Standard
32022 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32023 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32024 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32025 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32028 \begin_layout Standard
32029 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32030 allows you to put text into branches.
32031 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32032 To create a branch, either select the menu
32034 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32035 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32038 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32040 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32047 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32048 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32049 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32050 and whether the name of the branch should
32051 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32052 (see below for an example).
32053 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32054 to the name of the other) and to add
32055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32070 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32071 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32074 \begin_layout Standard
32075 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32076 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32081 where you can choose a branch.
32082 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32086 \begin_layout Standard
32087 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32088 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32091 \begin_layout Standard
32092 \begin_inset Branch Question
32096 \begin_layout Standard
32097 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32105 \begin_layout Standard
32106 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32110 \begin_layout Standard
32111 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32119 \begin_layout Standard
32126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32130 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32131 Consider for example a file
32132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32139 which has the above branches.
32141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32148 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32172 branch were inactive,
32173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32188 branch was active, likewise
32189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32204 branch was active, and
32205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32208 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32212 if both branches were active.
32213 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32214 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32220 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32221 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32229 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32235 \begin_inset Branch Question
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32241 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32242 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32250 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32251 To control whether a particular inset is
32252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32259 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32266 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32272 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32276 \begin_layout Standard
32277 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32283 \begin_layout Standard
32284 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32285 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32286 definitions for each branch.
32287 For example you can define for the question branch
32291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32292 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32293 -syntax, see section
32294 \begin_inset space ~
32298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32300 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32312 \begin_layout Standard
32322 \begin_layout Standard
32332 \begin_layout Standard
32333 and for the answer branch
32336 \begin_layout Standard
32346 \begin_layout Standard
32356 \begin_layout Standard
32357 \begin_inset Branch Question
32361 \begin_layout Standard
32365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32394 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32398 \begin_layout Standard
32402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32430 \begin_layout Standard
32431 Now it is possible to use the
32435 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32442 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32445 commands to obtain conditional output.
32446 Here is an example formula where only the
32453 \begin_inset Formula
32455 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32463 \begin_layout Standard
32464 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32472 \begin_layout Standard
32473 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32479 \begin_inset space \space{}
32482 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32484 For this advanced usage, see the
32490 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32495 \begin_layout Section
32497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32499 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32504 \begin_inset Index idx
32507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32516 \begin_layout Standard
32519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32520 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32523 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32525 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32531 \begin_inset Index idx
32534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32536 -packages ! hyperref
32541 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32542 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32543 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32544 part of the document.
32548 \begin_layout Standard
32549 The header information in the dialog tab
32553 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32554 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32555 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32556 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32569 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32570 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32571 and author entries.
32575 \begin_inset space ~
32579 \begin_inset space ~
32583 \begin_inset space ~
32588 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32591 \begin_layout Standard
32592 You can specify in the dialog tab
32596 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32601 \begin_inset space ~
32605 \begin_inset space ~
32609 \begin_inset space ~
32614 option allows long links to be split;
32617 \begin_inset space ~
32621 \begin_inset space ~
32625 \begin_inset space ~
32633 \begin_inset space ~
32638 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32641 \begin_inset space ~
32646 colors the different links.
32647 The default colors are:
32650 \begin_layout Labeling
32651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32656 for hyperlinks and URLs
32659 \begin_layout Labeling
32660 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32668 \begin_layout Labeling
32669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32678 but you can change these in the field
32683 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32686 \begin_layout Standard
32689 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32692 \begin_layout Standard
32697 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32698 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32699 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32702 \begin_layout Standard
32707 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32708 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32709 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32719 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32720 when opening the PDF.
32722 \begin_inset space ~
32725 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32726 \begin_inset space ~
32729 1 will only display the sections.
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32733 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32734 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32740 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32741 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32750 \begin_layout Section
32752 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32756 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32763 \begin_layout Subsection
32766 \begin_inset Index idx
32769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32779 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32786 \begin_layout Standard
32787 As \SpecialChar LyX
32788 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32789 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32790 commands and constructs,
32793 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32794 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32795 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32796 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32797 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32798 cannot support all packages and
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32803 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32804 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32805 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32809 Code box is created by the menu
32811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32813 \begin_inset space ~
32818 or by the toolbar button
32831 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32839 \begin_layout Standard
32840 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32842 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32844 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
32845 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32852 , you can write the command part
32858 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32859 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32863 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32864 Code box behind the word.
32865 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32866 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32870 \begin_layout Standard
32871 \begin_inset Graphics
32872 filename clipart/ERT.png
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32884 \begin_layout Standard
32885 This is a line with a
32889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32912 \begin_layout Standard
32913 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32921 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32922 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32923 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32924 know that the command is finished.
32932 \begin_layout Subsection
32933 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32935 \begin_inset Argument 1
32938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32939 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32946 \begin_inset Index idx
32949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32959 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32966 \begin_layout Standard
32967 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32968 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32969 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32970 uses in the background.
32971 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32972 is based on commands, you can
32973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32981 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32982 any time if you know the right commands.
32983 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32984 is the end of the day.
32985 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32986 all caption labels bold.
32987 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32989 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32993 \begin_layout Standard
32994 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32996 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32998 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33001 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33010 \begin_layout Standard
33011 As result you find that the package
33016 \begin_inset Index idx
33019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33021 -packages ! caption
33027 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33032 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33036 \begin_inset space ~
33044 \begin_layout Standard
33049 usepackage[options]{package name}
33052 \begin_layout Standard
33053 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33054 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33055 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33056 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33059 \begin_layout Standard
33060 In your case the package name is
33065 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33070 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33071 So you add the command
33074 \begin_layout Standard
33079 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33088 For more commands provided by the
33092 package, have a look at its documentation,
33093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33108 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33110 For example if you use a
33114 class, you don't need the package
33118 , you can instead write
33121 \begin_layout Standard
33126 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33131 \begin_layout Standard
33132 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33133 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33134 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33141 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33144 \begin_layout Standard
33145 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33146 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33148 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33149 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33150 Code box as described in the previous
33154 \begin_layout Standard
33155 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33156 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33159 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33161 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33168 \begin_layout Standard
33169 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
33175 \begin_layout Standard
33179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33189 \begin_inset Note Note
33192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33193 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33201 \begin_layout Left Header
33202 \begin_inset Argument 1
33205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33225 \begin_inset Note Note
33228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33229 defines the header line as described below
33237 \begin_layout Center Header
33238 \begin_inset Argument 1
33241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33250 \begin_layout Right Header
33251 \begin_inset Argument 1
33254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33275 \begin_layout Left Footer
33276 \begin_inset Argument 1
33279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33300 \begin_layout Center Footer
33301 \begin_inset Argument 1
33304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33316 \begin_inset Newline newline
33320 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33326 \begin_layout Right Footer
33327 \begin_inset Argument 1
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33352 \begin_layout Section
33353 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33356 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33361 \begin_inset Index idx
33364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33365 Document ! Header/Footer line
33371 \begin_inset Index idx
33374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33383 \begin_layout Standard
33384 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33388 \begin_inset space ~
33399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33405 \begin_inset space ~
33411 As a second step add in the menu
33413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33414 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33423 Custom Header/Footerlines
33426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33430 This module offers the following 6
33431 \begin_inset space ~
33437 \begin_layout Description
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33443 \begin_inset space ~
33447 \begin_inset space ~
33451 \begin_inset space ~
33455 \begin_inset space ~
33461 \begin_layout Description
33463 \begin_inset space ~
33467 \begin_inset space ~
33471 \begin_inset space ~
33475 \begin_inset space ~
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33485 \begin_layout Standard
33486 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33487 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33490 \begin_layout Standard
33491 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33492 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33494 \begin_inset space ~
33498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33500 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33504 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33507 \begin_layout Standard
33508 \begin_inset Float figure
33514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33517 \begin_inset Tabular
33518 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33519 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33520 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33521 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33522 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33542 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33571 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33586 The normal text on the page goes here.
33587 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33589 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33590 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33595 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33604 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33633 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33644 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33662 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33680 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33685 name "fig:Page-layout"
33689 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33702 \begin_layout Standard
33703 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33711 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33715 \begin_inset space ~
33720 is set to “Default”.
33721 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33730 \begin_layout Subsection
33734 \begin_layout Standard
33735 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33736 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33737 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33738 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33740 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33742 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33745 \begin_layout Standard
33746 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33747 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33753 \begin_inset space ~
33761 \begin_layout Description
33764 thepage prints the current page number
33767 \begin_layout Description
33770 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33773 \begin_layout Description
33776 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33779 \begin_layout Description
33782 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33783 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33790 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33793 because it usually goes in a left header.
33796 \begin_layout Description
33799 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33800 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33802 It is normally used in the right header.
33805 \begin_layout Subsection
33806 Default header/footer
33809 \begin_layout Standard
33810 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33811 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33812 footer has the page number.
33813 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33814 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33815 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33818 \begin_inset space ~
33826 \begin_layout Subsection
33830 \begin_layout Standard
33831 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33832 Some pages are different.
33833 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33834 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33835 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33836 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33837 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33841 Header and footer decoration line
33844 \begin_layout Standard
33845 By default, you get a 0.4
33846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33849 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33850 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33862 in the following way:
33865 \begin_layout Standard
33872 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33875 \begin_layout Standard
33876 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33889 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33896 \begin_layout Standard
33897 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33899 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33900 \begin_inset space ~
33904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33914 Several header/footer lines
33917 \begin_layout Standard
33918 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33919 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33920 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33922 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33940 \begin_inset space ~
33948 \begin_layout Standard
33955 headheight}{height}
33958 \begin_layout Standard
33963 is a size in standard units (e.
33964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33968 \begin_inset space \space{}
33976 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33977 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33978 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33979 logfile with the menu
33981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33991 \begin_inset space ~
33996 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34001 \begin_inset Index idx
34004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34006 -packages ! fancyhdr
34012 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34013 for your header/footer.
34016 \begin_layout Subsection
34020 \begin_layout Standard
34021 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34022 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34023 This example consists of the following definition:
34026 \begin_layout Description
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34037 , empty optional argument
34040 \begin_layout Description
34042 \begin_inset space ~
34045 Header empty, empty optional argument
34048 \begin_layout Description
34050 \begin_inset space ~
34059 in the optional argument
34062 \begin_layout Description
34064 \begin_inset space ~
34073 in the optional argument
34076 \begin_layout Description
34078 \begin_inset space ~
34091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34095 \begin_inset Newline newline
34099 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34106 in the optional argument
34109 \begin_layout Description
34111 \begin_inset space ~
34120 , empty optional argument
34123 \begin_layout Description
34126 headrulewidth set to 2
34127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34134 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34135 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34141 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34165 pagestyle{headings}
34171 \begin_inset Note Note
34174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34175 switches back to page style with the default headings
34183 \begin_layout Section
34184 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34187 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34192 \begin_inset Index idx
34195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34202 \begin_inset Index idx
34205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34214 \begin_layout Standard
34216 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34217 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34218 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34221 \begin_layout Subsection
34225 \begin_layout Standard
34226 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34232 \begin_inset Index idx
34235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34237 -packages ! preview-latex
34242 (on some systems named simply
34247 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34249 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34255 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34257 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34265 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34266 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34267 -package are automatically
34268 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34272 \begin_layout Subsection
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34278 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34280 activate the option
34283 \begin_inset space ~
34290 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34296 \begin_inset space ~
34300 \begin_inset space ~
34303 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34310 \begin_inset space ~
34323 \begin_inset space ~
34328 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34331 \begin_layout Standard
34332 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34337 \begin_inset space ~
34345 \begin_inset space ~
34353 \begin_layout Standard
34354 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34355 and when you finish
34359 \begin_layout Standard
34360 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34368 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34369 generated by activating the option
34372 \begin_inset space ~
34378 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34386 \begin_layout Subsection
34387 Selected document parts
34390 \begin_layout Standard
34391 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34392 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34393 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34394 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34396 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34402 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34403 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34404 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34407 \begin_layout Standard
34408 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34415 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34427 is explained in section
34429 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34434 \begin_inset space ~
34444 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34445 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34446 the final rotated boxes,
34447 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34448 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34450 Here is the result:
34453 \begin_layout Standard
34454 \begin_inset Preview
34456 \begin_layout Standard
34461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34465 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34471 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34481 height_special "totalheight"
34486 backgroundcolor "none"
34489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34514 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34520 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34542 \begin_layout Standard
34543 Previewing works also for colors.
34544 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34563 is explained in section
34570 \begin_inset space ~
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34584 \begin_inset Preview
34586 \begin_layout Standard
34590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34609 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34614 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34634 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34640 \begin_layout Standard
34641 If \SpecialChar LyX
34642 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34643 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34644 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34645 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34646 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34647 the \SpecialChar TeX
34649 If \SpecialChar LyX
34650 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34651 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34653 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34654 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34655 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34658 \begin_layout Subsection
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34664 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34665 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34668 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34670 \begin_inset space ~
34675 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34677 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34679 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34680 's main window, then only this selection
34681 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34682 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34683 the source view window.
34688 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34689 ; but note that if you have
34690 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34692 not just the one which is open at the time.
34695 \begin_layout Section
34696 Advanced Find and Replace
34697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34699 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34704 \begin_inset Index idx
34707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34714 \begin_inset Index idx
34717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34726 \begin_layout Subsection
34730 \begin_layout Standard
34731 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34732 allows for searching of complex,
34733 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34735 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34736 The key-features are:
34739 \begin_layout Itemize
34740 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34741 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34742 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34746 \begin_layout Itemize
34747 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34748 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34749 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34750 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34753 \begin_layout Itemize
34754 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34755 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34756 outside of mathematics environments
34759 \begin_layout Itemize
34760 Search may be widened to a specific
34765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34769 \begin_inset space ~
34772 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34773 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34780 \begin_layout Itemize
34781 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34782 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34787 \begin_inset space ~
34790 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34793 \begin_layout Subsection
34797 \begin_layout Standard
34798 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34800 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34813 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34816 ) or the toolbar button
34819 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34825 Advanced Find and Replace
34830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34840 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34844 \begin_inset space ~
34849 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34852 arg "paragraph-break"
34856 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34857 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34861 arg "paragraph-break"
34864 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34868 searches backwards.
34871 \begin_layout Standard
34875 \begin_inset space ~
34880 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34889 \begin_inset space ~
34894 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34898 Searching for mathematics
34901 \begin_layout Standard
34902 Mathematical formulas, such as
34903 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34906 or something more complex like
34907 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34910 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34915 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34916 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34917 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34918 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34928 \begin_layout Standard
34929 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34930 This is done by switching to the
34934 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34939 This way, entering in the
34946 \begin_layout Itemize
34947 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34948 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34951 \begin_layout Itemize
34952 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34953 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34956 \begin_layout Itemize
34957 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34958 of it only within section headings.
34959 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34960 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34964 \begin_layout Itemize
34965 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34966 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34973 \begin_layout Standard
34974 The entries made in the
34978 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34981 \begin_inset space ~
34987 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34991 button or alternatively press
34994 arg "paragraph-break"
35001 while the cursor is in the
35004 \begin_inset space ~
35012 \begin_layout Standard
35013 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35015 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35019 \begin_layout Itemize
35020 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35021 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35029 with its typewriter version
35030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35044 \begin_layout Itemize
35045 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35051 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35063 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35070 (you may want to enable the
35073 \begin_inset space ~
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35086 options and disable the
35094 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35102 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35103 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35107 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35110 , or occurrences of
35111 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35115 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35121 \begin_layout Subsection
35125 \begin_layout Standard
35126 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35131 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35135 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35144 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35150 This is done with the context menu
35152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35153 Insert Regular Expression
35155 while the cursor is in the
35160 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35161 expression matching rules
35165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35166 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35173 \begin_inset space ~
35176 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35177 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35183 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35184 same text in the document.
35185 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35186 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35189 \begin_layout Enumerate
35190 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35195 editor the fraction
35196 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35200 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35203 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35204 fractions with the given denominator.
35207 \begin_layout Enumerate
35208 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35220 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35225 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35226 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35227 Also, by inserting a
35228 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35231 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35232 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35235 \begin_layout Standard
35236 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35237 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35238 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35241 , and referring back to them through
35242 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35246 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35250 For example, try searching with the regexp
35251 \begin_inset Newline newline
35254 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35257 \begin_inset Newline newline
35260 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35263 \begin_layout Standard
35264 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35267 \begin_layout Standard
35268 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35276 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35277 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35278 sub-expressions is absolute.
35280 \begin_inset space ~
35284 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35287 always refers to the first occurrence of
35288 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35291 in all entered regexps.
35299 \begin_layout Section
35301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35303 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35308 \begin_inset Index idx
35311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35320 \begin_layout Standard
35322 has a built-in spell checker.
35325 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35332 key or the toolbar button
35335 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35338 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35339 beginning of the currently selected text.
35340 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35341 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35342 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35343 scrolled so that it is visible.
35344 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35345 n, if any could be found.
35346 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35350 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35351 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35354 \begin_layout Standard
35355 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35358 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35362 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35363 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35365 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35366 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35369 \begin_inset space ~
35377 arg "dialog-show character"
35380 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35382 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35386 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35387 can be downloaded from here:
35388 \begin_inset Newline newline
35392 \begin_inset Flex URL
35395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35397 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35403 \begin_inset Newline newline
35407 \begin_inset space ~
35410 files for each language.
35411 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35412 \begin_inset space ~
35415 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35416 's installation subfolder
35424 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35426 \begin_inset Newline newline
35429 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35430 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35431 but in most cases these are
35447 is the language code.
35450 \begin_layout Subsection
35454 \begin_layout Standard
35457 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35458 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35460 \begin_inset space ~
35463 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35466 you can set the following things:
35469 \begin_layout Description
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35474 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35475 should use for spell checking.
35476 Depending on your platform,
35490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35491 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35492 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35507 \begin_inset space ~
35510 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35513 \begin_layout Description
35515 \begin_inset space ~
35518 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35519 will always use the given language
35520 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35523 \begin_layout Description
35525 \begin_inset space ~
35528 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35534 \begin_inset space \space{}
35538 This should normally not be needed.
35541 \begin_layout Description
35543 \begin_inset space ~
35547 \begin_inset space ~
35550 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35562 \begin_layout Description
35564 \begin_inset space ~
35567 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35568 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35569 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35570 appear in a context menu.
35571 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35575 \begin_layout Description
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35588 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35592 \begin_layout Section
35594 \begin_inset Index idx
35597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35606 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35613 \begin_layout Standard
35615 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35616 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35626 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35628 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35637 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35639 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35640 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35641 which are available for many languages.
35644 \begin_layout Standard
35645 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35646 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35650 \begin_layout Subsection
35651 Setting up the thesaurus
35654 \begin_layout Standard
35663 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35667 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35672 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35678 \begin_inset space ~
35686 For instance, the US English files are named:
35689 \begin_layout Itemize
35693 \begin_layout Itemize
35697 \begin_layout Standard
35706 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35707 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35710 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35711 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35712 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35714 \begin_inset space ~
35719 ) to the path where they are installed.
35723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35724 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35725 ies, typical locations are
35731 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35735 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35739 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35742 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35748 LibreOffice-<Version>
35755 On the Mac, the default location is
35757 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35758 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35759 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35760 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35761 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35762 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35770 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35771 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35772 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35776 \begin_layout Standard
35777 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35778 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35782 \begin_layout Itemize
35783 \begin_inset Flex URL
35786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35788 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35796 \begin_layout Standard
35797 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35798 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35800 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35801 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35802 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35809 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35811 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35812 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35816 \begin_layout Standard
35817 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35819 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35822 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35828 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35831 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35832 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35840 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35841 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35842 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35844 \begin_inset space ~
35849 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35852 \begin_layout Subsection
35853 Using the thesaurus
35856 \begin_layout Standard
35857 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35859 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35862 or the toolbar button
35865 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35868 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35870 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35872 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35873 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35874 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35883 ), related terms (such as
35886 \begin_inset space ~
35895 ), compounds (such as
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35907 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35916 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35919 \begin_layout Standard
35920 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35921 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35925 \begin_layout Standard
35926 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35927 the dictionary, such as the above
35931 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35936 \begin_inset space \space{}
35939 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35940 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35941 For example, looking up the word form
35945 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35950 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35955 \begin_inset space \space{}
35966 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35967 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35968 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35971 \begin_layout Section
35973 \begin_inset Index idx
35976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35983 \begin_inset Index idx
35986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35987 Document ! Change Tracking
35993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35995 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36002 \begin_layout Standard
36003 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36004 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36005 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36006 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36013 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36015 \begin_inset space ~
36023 \begin_layout Standard
36024 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36038 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36039 You can change the color in
36041 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36042 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36048 \begin_inset space ~
36053 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36059 \begin_inset Index idx
36062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36063 Color ! Change tracking
36068 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36069 's status bar when the
36070 cursor is in changed text.
36071 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36074 arg "changes-merge"
36080 \begin_layout Standard
36081 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36083 \begin_inset Index idx
36086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36095 \begin_layout Standard
36096 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36102 \begin_layout Standard
36103 \begin_inset Graphics
36104 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36112 \begin_layout Standard
36113 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36119 \begin_layout Standard
36120 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36123 \begin_layout Standard
36124 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36130 \begin_layout Standard
36131 \begin_inset Tabular
36132 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36133 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36134 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36135 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36145 arg "changes-track"
36153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36164 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36184 arg "changes-output"
36192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36198 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36203 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36205 \begin_inset space ~
36209 \begin_inset space ~
36213 \begin_inset space ~
36222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36243 Jumps to the next change
36249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36258 arg "change-accept"
36266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36272 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36274 \begin_inset space ~
36277 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36279 \begin_inset space ~
36288 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36297 arg "change-reject"
36305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36311 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36313 \begin_inset space ~
36316 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36336 arg "changes-merge"
36344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36355 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36357 \begin_inset space ~
36366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36375 arg "all-changes-accept"
36383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36394 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36409 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36418 arg "all-changes-reject"
36426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36437 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36476 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36478 \begin_inset space ~
36487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36510 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36528 \begin_layout Standard
36529 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36535 \begin_layout Standard
36536 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36556 \begin_layout Standard
36557 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36558 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36559 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36560 the next change after the current cursor position.
36561 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36562 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36563 step to the next change.
36564 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36567 \begin_layout Standard
36568 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36569 to describe a change.
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36573 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36579 \begin_inset Index idx
36582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36584 -packages ! dvipost
36590 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36598 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36602 \begin_layout Section
36603 Comparison of Documents
36604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36606 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36611 \begin_inset Index idx
36614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36615 Comparison of documents
36623 \begin_layout Standard
36624 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36627 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36631 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36632 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36634 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36636 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36644 \begin_inset space ~
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36657 \begin_inset space ~
36661 \begin_inset space ~
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36669 \begin_inset space ~
36673 \begin_inset space ~
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36682 enables the change tracking option
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36689 \begin_inset space ~
36693 \begin_inset space ~
36698 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36701 \begin_layout Section
36702 International Support
36703 \begin_inset Index idx
36706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36707 International support
36715 \begin_layout Standard
36716 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36717 with any language you want.
36718 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36719 up \SpecialChar LyX
36721 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36723 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36730 \begin_layout Standard
36731 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36732 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36733 \begin_inset space ~
36737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36739 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36746 \begin_layout Subsection
36748 \begin_inset Index idx
36751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36758 \begin_inset Index idx
36761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36762 Document ! Settings
36768 \begin_inset Index idx
36771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36772 Document ! Language
36780 \begin_layout Standard
36783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36784 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36787 dialog lets you set
36789 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36794 \begin_layout Standard
36799 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36804 \begin_inset space ~
36809 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36810 For details about the different encoding options see section
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36817 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36824 \begin_layout Subsection
36825 Keyboard mapping configuration
36826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36828 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36835 \begin_layout Standard
36836 If you have for example a U.
36837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36840 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36841 can use an alternate keymap.
36842 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36847 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36848 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36849 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36852 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36853 \begin_inset space ~
36857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36859 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36864 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36865 which one you want to use.
36868 \begin_layout Standard
36869 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36870 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36871 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36875 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36876 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36877 one to support the characters you want.
36878 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36885 \begin_layout Chapter
36888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36890 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36898 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36899 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36900 topic inside the user's guide.
36903 \begin_layout Section
36905 \begin_inset Index idx
36908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36917 \begin_layout Standard
36922 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36925 \begin_layout Subsection
36929 \begin_layout Standard
36930 Creates a new document.
36933 \begin_layout Subsection
36937 \begin_layout Standard
36938 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36939 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36940 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36943 \begin_layout Subsection
36947 \begin_layout Standard
36951 \begin_layout Subsection
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36956 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36957 Click there on a file to open it.
36960 \begin_layout Subsection
36964 \begin_layout Standard
36965 Closes the current document.
36968 \begin_layout Subsection
36972 \begin_layout Standard
36973 Closes all opened documents.
36976 \begin_layout Subsection
36980 \begin_layout Standard
36981 Saves the actual document.
36984 \begin_layout Subsection
36988 \begin_layout Standard
36989 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36992 \begin_layout Subsection
36996 \begin_layout Standard
36997 Saves all opened documents.
37000 \begin_layout Subsection
37004 \begin_layout Standard
37005 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37008 \begin_layout Subsection
37012 \begin_layout Standard
37013 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37014 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37015 It is described in the section
37017 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37022 Additional Features
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37033 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37035 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37036 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37040 \begin_layout Standard
37041 When using the menu entry
37044 \begin_inset space ~
37049 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37057 \begin_inset space ~
37061 \begin_inset space ~
37066 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37067 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37070 \begin_layout Subsection
37072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37074 name "subsec:Export"
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37082 You can export your document to various file formats.
37083 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37085 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37086 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37087 during its configuration.
37090 \begin_layout Standard
37091 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37099 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37106 \begin_layout Description
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37115 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37117 \begin_inset space ~
37120 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37121 \begin_inset Newline newline
37124 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37125 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37129 \begin_layout Description
37130 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37136 \begin_layout Description
37138 \begin_inset space ~
37141 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37147 \begin_layout Description
37148 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37149 's native DVI-format.
37150 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37151 files paths or file names in your document.
37153 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37160 \begin_layout Description
37161 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37162 in files paths or file names
37165 \begin_layout Description
37167 \begin_inset space ~
37174 ) DVI-format using the program
37176 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37179 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37183 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37191 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37199 \begin_layout Description
37201 \begin_inset space ~
37204 (cropped) the same as
37208 but with cropped page margins.
37211 \begin_layout Description
37213 \begin_inset space ~
37216 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37220 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37225 \begin_layout Description
37229 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37237 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37245 \begin_layout Description
37247 \begin_inset space ~
37251 \begin_inset space ~
37254 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37258 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37266 \begin_layout Description
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37279 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37280 source that is compilable with the program
37282 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37286 \begin_layout Description
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37295 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37296 source, additionally all images used in the document
37297 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37301 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37304 \begin_layout Description
37308 \begin_inset space ~
37313 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37314 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37315 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37323 \begin_layout Description
37327 \begin_inset space ~
37336 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37337 source that is compilable with the program
37343 \begin_layout Description
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37349 \begin_inset space ~
37356 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37357 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37363 \begin_layout Description
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37368 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37369 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37375 \begin_inset space \space{}
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37399 represent the version number)
37402 \begin_layout Description
37404 \begin_inset space ~
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37411 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37412 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37413 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37417 \begin_layout Description
37418 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37419 's internal XHTML engine
37422 \begin_layout Description
37424 \begin_inset space ~
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37436 \begin_inset space ~
37439 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37444 For the conversion the program
37453 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37456 \begin_layout Description
37457 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37462 \begin_layout Description
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37467 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37469 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37472 For the conversion the program
37481 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37484 \begin_layout Description
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37489 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37490 For the conversion the program
37499 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37502 \begin_layout Description
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37507 (cropped) the same as
37510 \begin_inset space ~
37515 but with cropped page margins
37518 \begin_layout Description
37522 \begin_inset space ~
37527 PDF-format using the program
37531 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37534 \begin_layout Description
37538 \begin_inset space ~
37542 \begin_inset space ~
37550 \begin_inset space ~
37555 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37560 \begin_inset space \space{}
37563 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37567 \begin_layout Description
37571 \begin_inset space ~
37576 PDF-format using the program
37578 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37581 , produces PDF-files directly
37584 \begin_layout Description
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37593 PDF-format using the program
37597 , produces PDF-files directly
37600 \begin_layout Description
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37609 PDF-format using the program
37613 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37616 \begin_layout Description
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37625 PDF-format using the program
37630 , produces PDF-files directly
37633 \begin_layout Description
37637 \begin_inset space ~
37645 \begin_layout Description
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37653 \begin_inset space ~
37658 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37659 and then exported as text using the program
37664 \begin_layout Description
37669 PostScript format using the program
37677 options see section
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37684 reference "subsec:General-output"
37691 \begin_layout Description
37692 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37693 source and also code in the statistical programming
37707 it is possible to use
37711 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 If one of the menu entries
37723 \begin_inset space ~
37732 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37734 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37736 \begin_inset space ~
37740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37742 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37747 \begin_inset Index idx
37750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37751 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37760 \begin_layout Subsection
37764 \begin_layout Standard
37765 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37766 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37775 reference "sec:Paths"
37780 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37789 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37790 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37791 's preferences as described in section
37792 \begin_inset space ~
37796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37798 reference "subsec:Converters"
37805 \begin_layout Subsection
37806 New and Close Window
37809 \begin_layout Standard
37810 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37814 \begin_layout Subsection
37818 \begin_layout Standard
37819 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37822 \begin_layout Section
37824 \begin_inset Index idx
37827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37836 \begin_layout Subsection
37840 \begin_layout Standard
37841 Described in section
37842 \begin_inset space ~
37846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37848 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37855 \begin_layout Subsection
37856 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37859 \begin_layout Standard
37860 Described in section
37861 \begin_inset space ~
37865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37867 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37874 \begin_layout Subsection
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37879 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37880 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37883 \begin_layout Subsection
37887 \begin_layout Standard
37888 Selects the whole document.
37891 \begin_layout Subsection
37892 Find & Replace (Quick)
37895 \begin_layout Standard
37896 Described in section
37897 \begin_inset space ~
37901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37903 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37910 \begin_layout Subsection
37911 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37914 \begin_layout Standard
37915 Described in section
37916 \begin_inset space ~
37920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37922 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37929 \begin_layout Subsection
37930 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37933 \begin_layout Standard
37934 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37938 \begin_layout Subsection
37942 \begin_layout Standard
37943 Described in section
37944 \begin_inset space ~
37948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37950 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37957 \begin_layout Subsection
37959 \begin_inset Index idx
37962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37963 Paragraph ! Settings
37971 \begin_layout Standard
37972 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37973 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37977 \begin_layout Standard
37978 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37979 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37986 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37996 \begin_layout Subsection
37997 Table and Rows & Columns
38000 \begin_layout Standard
38001 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38002 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38003 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38006 \begin_layout Subsection
38010 \begin_layout Standard
38011 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38012 It will dissolve this inset.
38013 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38017 \begin_layout Subsection
38021 \begin_layout Standard
38022 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38023 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38026 \begin_layout Subsection
38027 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38030 \begin_layout Standard
38031 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38033 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38034 \begin_inset space ~
38038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38040 reference "sec:Nesting"
38045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38047 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38054 \begin_layout Subsection
38057 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38060 \begin_layout Standard
38061 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38062 nts of the same type.
38064 \begin_inset space ~
38068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38070 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38074 for an explanation.
38077 \begin_layout Section
38079 \begin_inset Index idx
38082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38091 \begin_layout Standard
38092 At the bottom of the
38096 menu the opened documents are listed.
38099 \begin_layout Subsection
38100 Open/Close all Insets
38103 \begin_layout Standard
38104 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38107 \begin_layout Subsection
38108 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38111 \begin_layout Standard
38112 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38115 \begin_layout Standard
38116 Math macros are described in the
38123 \begin_layout Subsection
38127 \begin_layout Standard
38128 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38135 reference "sec:Navigating"
38140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38142 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38149 \begin_layout Subsection
38153 \begin_layout Standard
38154 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38156 \begin_inset space ~
38160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38162 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38169 \begin_layout Subsection
38173 \begin_layout Standard
38174 Opens a window showing console messages.
38175 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38180 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38181 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38182 is processing the document.
38185 \begin_layout Subsection
38187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38189 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38194 \begin_inset Index idx
38197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38207 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38208 All toolbars and the
38211 \begin_inset space ~
38216 can be turned on and off.
38221 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38233 \begin_inset space ~
38245 \begin_inset space ~
38250 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38254 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38261 \begin_layout Standard
38266 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38270 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38271 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38272 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38273 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38274 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38277 \begin_layout Standard
38279 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38280 \begin_inset space ~
38284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38286 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38293 \begin_layout Subsection
38297 \begin_layout Standard
38301 \begin_inset space ~
38305 \begin_inset space ~
38309 \begin_inset space ~
38313 \begin_inset space ~
38317 \begin_inset space ~
38321 \begin_inset space ~
38326 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38327 's main window vertically while
38330 \begin_inset space ~
38334 \begin_inset space ~
38338 \begin_inset space ~
38342 \begin_inset space ~
38346 \begin_inset space ~
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38355 will split it horizontally.
38356 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38357 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38358 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38359 three or more documents at the same time.
38360 To close a split view, use the menu
38363 \begin_inset space ~
38367 \begin_inset space ~
38375 \begin_layout Subsection
38379 \begin_layout Standard
38380 Closes a split view.
38383 \begin_layout Subsection
38387 \begin_layout Standard
38388 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38389 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38390 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38391 's main window fullscreen.
38392 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38393 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38396 \begin_layout Section
38398 \begin_inset Index idx
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38410 \begin_layout Subsection
38414 \begin_layout Standard
38415 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38416 \begin_inset space ~
38420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38422 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38433 \begin_layout Subsection
38435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38437 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38444 \begin_layout Standard
38445 Here you can insert the following characters:
38448 \begin_layout Description
38453 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38456 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38457 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38458 -packages you have installed.
38459 You can get a complete display by checking
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38468 \begin_inset Newline newline
38472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 Not all characters will be visible in the
38484 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38485 dialog (see section
38486 \begin_inset space ~
38490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38492 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38496 ) can display every character.
38504 \begin_layout Description
38505 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38509 \begin_layout Description
38511 \begin_inset space ~
38515 \begin_inset space ~
38518 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38519 \begin_inset space ~
38523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38525 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38532 \begin_layout Description
38534 \begin_inset space ~
38537 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38541 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38547 \begin_layout Description
38549 \begin_inset space ~
38552 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38556 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38562 \begin_layout Description
38564 \begin_inset space ~
38567 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38571 \begin_layout Description
38573 \begin_inset space ~
38576 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38580 \begin_layout Description
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38585 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38591 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38597 \begin_layout Description
38599 \begin_inset space ~
38602 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38606 \begin_layout Description
38608 \begin_inset space ~
38612 \begin_inset Index idx
38615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38622 \begin_inset Index idx
38625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38626 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38631 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38632 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38634 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38640 \begin_inset Index idx
38643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38651 \begin_inset Newline newline
38654 More information about this feature can be found in the
38660 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38666 \begin_layout Description
38667 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38669 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38670 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38674 \begin_layout Subsection
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38679 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38682 \begin_layout Description
38683 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38684 \begin_inset script superscript
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 \begin_layout Description
38696 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38697 \begin_inset script subscript
38699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38708 \begin_layout Description
38710 \begin_inset space ~
38713 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38714 \begin_inset space ~
38718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38720 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38727 \begin_layout Description
38729 \begin_inset space ~
38732 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38733 \begin_inset space ~
38737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38739 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38746 \begin_layout Description
38748 \begin_inset space ~
38751 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38758 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38765 \begin_layout Description
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38770 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38776 \begin_inset space \space{}
38779 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38780 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38789 To insert a fraction use the command
38794 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38798 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38807 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38814 \begin_layout Description
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38819 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38820 \begin_inset space ~
38824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38826 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38833 \begin_layout Description
38835 \begin_inset space ~
38838 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38839 \begin_inset space ~
38843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38845 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38852 \begin_layout Description
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38857 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38858 \begin_inset space ~
38862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38864 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38871 \begin_layout Description
38872 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38879 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38886 \begin_layout Description
38888 \begin_inset space ~
38891 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38892 \begin_inset space ~
38896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38898 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38905 \begin_layout Description
38907 \begin_inset space ~
38910 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38911 \begin_inset space ~
38915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38917 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38924 \begin_layout Description
38926 \begin_inset space ~
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38933 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38940 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38947 \begin_layout Description
38949 \begin_inset space ~
38952 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38953 as described in section
38954 \begin_inset space ~
38958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38960 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38967 \begin_layout Description
38969 \begin_inset space ~
38972 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38973 \begin_inset space ~
38977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38979 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38986 \begin_layout Description
38988 \begin_inset space ~
38991 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38992 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38994 \begin_inset space ~
38998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39000 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39007 \begin_layout Description
39009 \begin_inset space ~
39012 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39013 \begin_inset space ~
39017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39019 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39026 \begin_layout Description
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39035 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39036 \begin_inset space ~
39040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39042 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39049 \begin_layout Subsection
39053 \begin_layout Standard
39054 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39058 \begin_inset space ~
39079 are described in section
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39086 reference "sec:toc"
39095 is described in section
39096 \begin_inset space ~
39100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39102 reference "sec:Index"
39110 is described in section
39111 \begin_inset space ~
39115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39117 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39123 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39126 is described in section
39127 \begin_inset space ~
39131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39133 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39140 \begin_layout Subsection
39144 \begin_layout Standard
39145 To insert floats, as described in section
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39152 reference "sec:Floats"
39156 and in detail the chapter
39163 \begin_inset space ~
39171 \begin_layout Subsection
39175 \begin_layout Standard
39176 To insert notes, described in section
39177 \begin_inset space ~
39181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39183 reference "sec:Notes"
39190 \begin_layout Subsection
39194 \begin_layout Standard
39195 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39197 Branches are described in section
39198 \begin_inset space ~
39202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39204 reference "sec:Branches"
39211 \begin_layout Subsection
39215 \begin_layout Standard
39216 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39217 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39219 An example is the document class
39220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39227 with three custom insets.
39230 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39234 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39240 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39243 \begin_layout Subsection
39245 \begin_inset Index idx
39248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39257 \begin_layout Standard
39258 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39260 For more information see chapter
39262 External Document Parts
39265 \begin_inset space ~
39271 \begin_layout Subsection
39273 \begin_inset Index idx
39276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39285 \begin_layout Standard
39286 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39287 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39294 \begin_inset space ~
39302 \begin_layout Subsection
39306 \begin_layout Standard
39311 dialog as described in section
39312 \begin_inset space ~
39316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39318 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39325 \begin_layout Subsection
39329 \begin_layout Standard
39334 as described in section
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39341 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39348 \begin_layout Subsection
39352 \begin_layout Standard
39357 as described in section
39358 \begin_inset space ~
39362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39364 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39371 \begin_layout Subsection
39373 \begin_inset Index idx
39376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39383 \begin_inset Index idx
39386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39395 \begin_layout Standard
39396 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39397 Floats are described in section
39398 \begin_inset space ~
39402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39404 reference "sec:Floats"
39408 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39410 Multi-page Captions
39415 \begin_inset space ~
39423 \begin_layout Subsection
39427 \begin_layout Standard
39428 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39429 \begin_inset space ~
39433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39435 reference "sec:Index"
39442 \begin_layout Subsection
39446 \begin_layout Standard
39447 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39448 \begin_inset space ~
39452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39454 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39461 \begin_layout Subsection
39465 \begin_layout Standard
39466 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39467 Tables are described in section
39468 \begin_inset space ~
39472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39474 reference "sec:Tables"
39478 and in detail in the chapter
39485 \begin_inset space ~
39493 \begin_layout Subsection
39497 \begin_layout Standard
39503 Graphics are described in section
39504 \begin_inset space ~
39508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39510 reference "sec:Graphics"
39517 \begin_layout Subsection
39521 \begin_layout Standard
39522 Inserts a URL as described in section
39523 \begin_inset space ~
39527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39529 reference "subsec:URLs"
39536 \begin_layout Subsection
39540 \begin_layout Standard
39541 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39542 \begin_inset space ~
39546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39548 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39555 \begin_layout Subsection
39559 \begin_layout Standard
39560 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39567 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39574 \begin_layout Subsection
39578 \begin_layout Standard
39579 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39580 \begin_inset space ~
39584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39586 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39593 \begin_layout Subsection
39597 \begin_layout Standard
39598 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39599 title or caption of a float.
39600 Inserts a short title as described in section
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39607 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39614 \begin_layout Subsection
39619 \begin_layout Standard
39620 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39621 Code box as described in section
39622 \begin_inset space ~
39626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39628 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39635 \begin_layout Subsection
39637 \begin_inset Index idx
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39649 \begin_layout Standard
39650 Inserts a program listings box.
39651 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39653 Program Code Listings
39658 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_layout Subsection
39670 \begin_layout Standard
39671 Inserts the actual date.
39672 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39676 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39684 \begin_inset space ~
39692 \begin_layout Subsection
39696 \begin_layout Standard
39697 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39698 \begin_inset space ~
39702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39704 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39711 \begin_layout Section
39713 \begin_inset Index idx
39716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39727 \begin_inset space ~
39730 of the current document.
39731 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39734 \begin_layout Subsection
39738 \begin_layout Standard
39739 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39740 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39741 to jump, for example, between section
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39746 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39750 2.5 and use the submenu
39753 \begin_inset space ~
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39764 \begin_inset space ~
39770 \begin_inset space ~
39774 \begin_inset space ~
39780 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39784 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39790 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39793 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39796 \begin_layout Standard
39797 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39806 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39809 \begin_inset space ~
39814 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39817 \begin_layout Subsection
39818 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39821 \begin_layout Standard
39822 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39826 \begin_layout Subsection
39830 \begin_layout Standard
39831 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39832 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39833 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39837 \begin_inset space ~
39841 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_layout Subsection
39853 \begin_layout Standard
39854 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39857 The \SpecialChar LyX
39858 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39860 \begin_inset space ~
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39873 manual for a detailed description.
39876 \begin_layout Section
39878 \begin_inset Index idx
39881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39890 \begin_layout Subsection
39894 \begin_layout Standard
39895 Change Tracking is described in section
39896 \begin_inset space ~
39900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39902 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39909 \begin_layout Subsection
39917 \begin_layout Standard
39918 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39919 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39920 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39922 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39923 to the clipboard or update the view.
39924 \begin_inset Newline newline
39927 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39931 \begin_layout Standard
39934 Open Containing Directory
39936 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39937 's temporary folder for the document.
39938 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39939 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39940 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39941 For example some journals require to send the
39945 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39949 \begin_layout Subsection
39950 Start Appendix Here
39953 \begin_layout Standard
39954 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39955 as described in section
39956 \begin_inset space ~
39960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39962 reference "sec:Appendices"
39969 \begin_layout Subsection
39971 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_layout Standard
39978 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39979 default output format for the document (menu
39981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39982 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39983 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39985 \begin_inset space ~
39989 \begin_inset space ~
39995 \begin_inset space ~
39999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40001 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40005 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40008 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40014 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40019 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40021 \begin_inset space ~
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40031 \begin_inset space ~
40035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40037 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40041 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40042 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40044 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40045 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40047 \begin_inset space ~
40050 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40055 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40065 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40070 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40071 when it is first configured.
40072 The default output format is
40075 \begin_inset space ~
40083 \begin_layout Subsection
40084 View (Other Formats)
40087 \begin_layout Standard
40088 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40089 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40090 actual document with an external program.
40091 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40092 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40093 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40095 All possible formats are listed in section
40096 \begin_inset space ~
40100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40102 reference "subsec:Export"
40107 You should at least see the menu entry
40112 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40114 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40116 \begin_inset space ~
40120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40122 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40127 \begin_inset Index idx
40130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40131 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40140 \begin_layout Standard
40141 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40142 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40144 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40145 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40147 \begin_inset space ~
40150 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40152 \begin_inset space ~
40155 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40165 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40170 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40171 when it is first configured.
40174 \begin_layout Subsection
40176 \begin_inset space ~
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40183 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40184 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40187 \begin_layout Subsection
40188 Update (Other Formats)
40191 \begin_layout Standard
40192 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40193 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40196 \begin_layout Subsection
40197 View Master Document
40200 \begin_layout Standard
40201 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40222 manual for more information on this topic).
40223 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40224 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40228 \begin_inset space ~
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40237 generates the output of the whole book, while
40241 will just output the chapter alone.
40244 \begin_layout Standard
40245 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40246 in the document settings (menu
40248 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40249 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40250 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40262 \begin_inset space ~
40266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40268 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40272 ) or in the preferences (menu
40274 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40275 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40277 \begin_inset space ~
40280 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40285 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40287 \begin_inset space ~
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40297 \begin_inset space ~
40301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40303 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40310 \begin_layout Subsection
40311 Update Master Document
40314 \begin_layout Standard
40315 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40331 \begin_inset space ~
40336 manual for more information on this topic).
40337 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40338 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40341 \begin_layout Standard
40342 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40343 in the document settings (menu
40345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40346 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40347 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40359 \begin_inset space ~
40363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40365 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40369 ) or in the preferences (menu
40371 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40372 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40377 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40379 \begin_inset space ~
40382 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40384 \begin_inset space ~
40388 \begin_inset space ~
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40400 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40407 \begin_layout Subsection
40409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40411 name "subsec:Compressed"
40418 \begin_layout Standard
40419 Un/compresses the current document.
40420 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40421 compression (see the
40423 Additional Features
40425 manual for details).
40428 \begin_layout Subsection
40432 \begin_layout Standard
40433 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40436 \begin_layout Subsection
40440 \begin_layout Standard
40441 The document settings are described in appendix
40442 \begin_inset space ~
40446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40448 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40455 \begin_layout Section
40457 \begin_inset Index idx
40460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40469 \begin_layout Subsection
40473 \begin_layout Standard
40474 Spell checking is explained in section
40475 \begin_inset space ~
40479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40481 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40488 \begin_layout Subsection
40492 \begin_layout Standard
40493 The thesaurus is described in section
40494 \begin_inset space ~
40498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40500 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40507 \begin_layout Subsection
40509 \begin_inset Index idx
40512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40519 \begin_inset Index idx
40522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40531 \begin_layout Standard
40532 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40533 the highlighted document part.
40536 \begin_layout Subsection
40542 \begin_inset Index idx
40545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40546 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40555 \begin_layout Standard
40556 Generates with the help of the program
40558 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40561 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40562 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40563 This feature is not available on Windows.
40566 \begin_layout Subsection
40572 \begin_inset Index idx
40575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40585 \begin_layout Standard
40586 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40596 to see the full filename paths.
40599 \begin_layout Subsection
40601 \begin_inset Index idx
40604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40613 \begin_layout Standard
40614 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40615 files as described in section
40616 \begin_inset space ~
40620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40622 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40629 \begin_layout Subsection
40631 \begin_inset Index idx
40634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40647 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40665 \begin_inset Index idx
40668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40669 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40678 \begin_layout Standard
40679 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40680 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40681 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40682 -packages and programs it needs; see
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40690 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40697 \begin_layout Subsection
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40706 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40713 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40720 \begin_layout Section
40722 \begin_inset Index idx
40725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40734 \begin_layout Standard
40735 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40736 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40738 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40742 \begin_layout Standard
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40751 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40752 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40753 packages and classes found
40754 by \SpecialChar LyX
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40762 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40769 \begin_layout Standard
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40778 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40783 \begin_layout Section
40785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40787 name "sec:Toolbars"
40794 \begin_layout Standard
40795 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40796 \begin_inset space ~
40800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40802 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40809 \begin_layout Standard
40810 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40811 This is described in the
40813 Additional Features
40818 \begin_layout Subsection
40820 \begin_inset Index idx
40823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40832 \begin_layout Standard
40833 \begin_inset Graphics
40834 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40842 \begin_layout Standard
40843 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40849 \begin_layout Standard
40850 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40867 \begin_inset Note Note
40870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40871 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40876 manual for more information.
40884 \begin_layout Standard
40885 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40891 \begin_layout Standard
40892 \begin_inset Tabular
40893 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40894 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40895 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40896 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40902 \begin_inset Graphics
40903 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40917 pull-down box for the environments
40930 \begin_layout Standard
40931 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40937 \begin_layout Standard
40939 \begin_inset Tabular
40940 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40941 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40942 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40943 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40967 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40997 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41027 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41043 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41057 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41073 arg "spelling-continuously"
41081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41085 Spellcheck continuously
41091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41144 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41151 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41174 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41181 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41204 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41211 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41241 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41250 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41290 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41332 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41346 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41347 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41375 Emphasize text, function of the
41377 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41382 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41412 Set text to noun style, function of the
41414 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41416 \begin_inset space ~
41419 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41437 arg "textstyle-apply"
41445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41449 Format text using the current settings in the
41451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41453 \begin_inset space ~
41456 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41465 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41489 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41491 \begin_inset space ~
41500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41509 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41537 arg "tabular-insert"
41545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41567 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41579 Toggle outline window on/off,
41581 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41597 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41609 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41615 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41624 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41636 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41649 \begin_layout Subsection
41651 \begin_inset Index idx
41654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41663 \begin_layout Standard
41664 \begin_inset Graphics
41665 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41673 \begin_layout Standard
41674 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41680 \begin_layout Standard
41681 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41685 \begin_layout Standard
41686 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41692 \begin_layout Standard
41693 \begin_inset Tabular
41694 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41695 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41696 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41697 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41734 arg "layout Enumerate"
41742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41761 arg "layout Itemize"
41769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41815 arg "layout Description"
41823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41842 arg "depth-increment"
41850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41856 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41858 \begin_inset space ~
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41880 arg "depth-decrement"
41888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41894 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41918 arg "float-insert figure"
41926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41933 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41949 arg "float-insert table"
41957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41964 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42010 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42040 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42086 \begin_inset space ~
42095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 arg "nomencl-insert"
42112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42120 \begin_inset space ~
42129 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42138 arg "footnote-insert"
42146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42184 \begin_inset space ~
42193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42217 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42237 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42258 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42288 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42313 \begin_inset space ~
42322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42331 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42346 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42362 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42377 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42397 arg "dialog-show character"
42405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42411 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42413 \begin_inset space ~
42416 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42432 arg "layout-paragraph"
42440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42446 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42448 \begin_inset space ~
42457 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42466 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42480 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42494 \begin_layout Subsection
42495 View/Update Toolbar
42496 \begin_inset Index idx
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42500 Toolbar ! View / Update
42508 \begin_layout Standard
42509 \begin_inset Graphics
42510 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42517 \begin_layout Standard
42518 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42524 \begin_layout Standard
42525 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42529 \begin_layout Standard
42530 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42536 \begin_layout Standard
42537 \begin_inset Tabular
42538 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42539 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42540 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42541 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42581 arg "buffer-update"
42589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42611 arg "master-buffer-view"
42619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42627 \begin_inset space ~
42636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42645 arg "master-buffer-update"
42653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42661 \begin_inset space ~
42665 \begin_inset space ~
42674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42683 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42698 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42699 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42700 Synchronize with Output
42706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42730 View (Other Formats)
42736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42743 arg "update-others"
42751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42758 Update (Other Formats)
42771 \begin_layout Standard
42772 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42776 \begin_layout Subsection
42780 \begin_layout Standard
42781 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42782 \begin_inset space ~
42786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42788 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42792 , the table toolbar
42793 \begin_inset Index idx
42796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42805 \begin_inset space ~
42810 manual and the math macro toolbar
42811 \begin_inset Index idx
42814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42827 \begin_layout Chapter
42828 The Document Settings
42829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42831 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42836 \begin_inset Index idx
42839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42840 Document ! Settings
42848 \begin_layout Standard
42852 \begin_inset space ~
42857 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42858 is called with the menu
42860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42864 You can save your document settings as default with the
42866 Save as Document Defaults
42868 button in any dialog.
42869 This will create a template named
42873 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42874 when you create a new document without
42878 \begin_layout Standard
42883 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42884 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42887 \begin_layout Standard
42888 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42889 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42890 to find the one you are looking for.
42891 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42892 the submenus of the dialog.
42894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42898 \begin_inset space \space{}
42902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42909 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42910 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42911 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42914 \begin_layout Section
42918 \begin_layout Standard
42919 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42921 Document classes are described in section
42922 \begin_inset space ~
42926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42928 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42936 \begin_layout Standard
42940 \begin_inset space ~
42945 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42950 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42951 as a layout for a document class.
42952 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42954 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42963 \begin_layout Standard
42964 Some classes use special class options by default.
42965 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42969 and you can decide to use them or not.
42970 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42971 recommended you leave them untouched.
42976 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42977 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42982 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42984 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42990 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42991 \begin_inset Newline newline
42996 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42999 \begin_inset Newline newline
43002 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43003 distribution, see section
43008 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43010 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43022 \begin_layout Standard
43027 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43028 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43029 in the background if the child document
43030 is opened without its master.
43031 This way child documents are always compilable.
43032 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43047 \begin_layout Standard
43048 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43059 \begin_inset Index idx
43062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 -packages ! prettyref
43070 \begin_inset Index idx
43073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43075 -packages ! refstyle
43080 for cross-references, see section
43081 \begin_inset space ~
43085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43087 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43094 \begin_layout Section
43098 \begin_layout Standard
43099 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43100 Please refer to the section
43103 \begin_inset space ~
43111 \begin_inset space ~
43116 manual for details.
43119 \begin_layout Section
43123 \begin_layout Standard
43124 Modules are explained in section
43125 \begin_inset space ~
43129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43131 reference "subsec:Modules"
43138 \begin_layout Section
43142 \begin_layout Standard
43144 \begin_inset space ~
43148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43150 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43157 \begin_layout Section
43161 \begin_layout Standard
43162 The document font settings are described in section
43163 \begin_inset space ~
43167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43169 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43176 \begin_layout Section
43180 \begin_layout Standard
43181 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43193 \begin_inset space ~
43198 and whether it should be a
43201 \begin_inset space ~
43206 can also be specified here.
43209 \begin_layout Standard
43210 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43211 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43212 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43214 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43217 \begin_layout Standard
43220 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43223 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43224 justifies the text on screen.
43225 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43229 \begin_layout Section
43233 \begin_layout Standard
43234 This dialog is described in sections
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43241 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43248 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43255 \begin_layout Section
43259 \begin_layout Standard
43260 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43261 \begin_inset space ~
43265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43267 reference "subsec:Margins"
43274 \begin_layout Section
43276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43278 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43283 \begin_inset Index idx
43286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43287 Language ! Encoding
43295 \begin_layout Standard
43296 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43297 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43298 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43300 is always encoded in utf8).
43301 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43302 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43303 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43304 -command is not known for
43305 a particular character).
43308 \begin_layout Standard
43309 If you use the option
43314 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43315 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43316 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43318 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43319 exactly one encoding.
43320 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43323 \begin_layout Standard
43325 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43326 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43327 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43328 installation supports Unicode), choose
43329 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43330 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43331 is quite incomplete, so
43332 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43337 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43338 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43339 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43340 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43341 -commands is not used, because all
43342 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43343 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43344 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43345 , two new alternative engines
43346 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43348 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43350 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43353 \begin_inset space ~
43361 \begin_inset space ~
43369 \begin_inset space ~
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43381 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43386 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43390 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43393 \begin_layout Standard
43397 \begin_inset space ~
43402 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43403 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43413 The possible settings are:
43416 \begin_layout Description
43417 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43419 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43420 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43424 \begin_inset space ~
43428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43430 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43437 \begin_layout Description
43438 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43439 format you will use.
43440 In many cases this will be
43445 \begin_inset Index idx
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43456 If the newer package
43461 \begin_inset Index idx
43464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43466 -packages ! polyglossia
43471 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43472 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43473 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43475 this package will be used instead of
43482 \begin_layout Description
43484 \begin_inset space ~
43495 would be more appropriate.
43498 \begin_layout Description
43499 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43500 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43504 (for German texts), type in
43507 \begin_inset Newline newline
43512 usepackage{ngerman}
43515 \begin_layout Description
43516 None will not use a language package.
43517 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43520 \begin_layout Standard
43521 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43524 \begin_layout Description
43526 \begin_inset space ~
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43541 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43547 \begin_inset Index idx
43550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43552 -packages ! inputenc
43558 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43559 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43560 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43564 \begin_layout Description
43565 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43567 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43568 commands, which may result in a big
43569 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43570 -commands are needed.
43573 \begin_layout Description
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43582 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43585 \begin_layout Description
43587 \begin_inset space ~
43591 \begin_inset space ~
43594 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43597 \begin_layout Description
43599 \begin_inset space ~
43602 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43605 \begin_layout Description
43607 \begin_inset space ~
43611 \begin_inset space ~
43614 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43615 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43618 \begin_layout Description
43620 \begin_inset space ~
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43627 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43631 \begin_layout Description
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43637 \begin_inset space ~
43640 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43641 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43644 \begin_layout Description
43646 \begin_inset space ~
43650 \begin_inset space ~
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43657 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43658 \begin_inset space ~
43664 \begin_layout Description
43666 \begin_inset space ~
43670 \begin_inset space ~
43674 \begin_inset space ~
43677 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43678 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43681 \begin_layout Description
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43687 \begin_inset space ~
43690 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43691 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43692 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43693 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43698 \begin_inset space ~
43704 \begin_layout Description
43706 \begin_inset space ~
43710 \begin_inset space ~
43713 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43714 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43715 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43717 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43718 \begin_inset space ~
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_layout Description
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43737 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43740 \begin_layout Description
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43749 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43752 \begin_layout Description
43754 \begin_inset space ~
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43761 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43764 \begin_layout Description
43766 \begin_inset space ~
43769 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43772 \begin_layout Description
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43777 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43780 \begin_layout Description
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43789 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43792 \begin_layout Description
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_layout Description
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43813 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43816 \begin_layout Description
43818 \begin_inset space ~
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43828 \begin_layout Description
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43837 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43843 \begin_inset Index idx
43846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 , when using this, set the document language to
43858 \begin_layout Description
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43867 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43872 , when using this, set the document language to
43875 \begin_inset space ~
43881 \begin_layout Description
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43887 \begin_inset space ~
43890 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43896 \begin_inset Index idx
43899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43901 -packages ! japanese
43906 , when using this, set the document language to
43911 \begin_layout Description
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43920 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43925 , when using this, set the document language to
43930 \begin_layout Description
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43939 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43944 , when using this, set the document language to
43949 \begin_layout Description
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43954 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43957 \begin_layout Description
43959 \begin_inset space ~
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43967 \begin_inset space ~
43970 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43973 \begin_layout Description
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43986 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43987 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43988 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43991 \begin_layout Description
43993 \begin_inset space ~
43997 \begin_inset space ~
44003 \begin_layout Description
44005 \begin_inset space ~
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44012 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44013 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44016 \begin_layout Description
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44025 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44031 \begin_inset Index idx
44034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44041 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44044 \begin_layout Description
44046 \begin_inset space ~
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44057 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44064 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44067 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44074 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44075 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44077 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44080 \begin_layout Description
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44089 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44095 \begin_inset Index idx
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44105 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44108 \begin_layout Description
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44113 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44119 \begin_inset Index idx
44122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44124 -packages ! inputenc
44130 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44134 \begin_layout Description
44136 \begin_inset space ~
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44147 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44154 \begin_layout Description
44156 \begin_inset space ~
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44164 \begin_inset space ~
44167 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44168 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44169 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44173 \begin_layout Description
44175 \begin_inset space ~
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44186 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44187 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44190 \begin_layout Section
44192 \begin_inset Index idx
44195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44202 \begin_inset Index idx
44205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44212 \begin_inset Index idx
44215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44216 Color ! Shaded boxes
44222 \begin_inset Index idx
44225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44226 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44234 \begin_layout Standard
44235 Here you can alter the font color for the
44239 (default: black), for
44242 \begin_inset space ~
44247 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44251 (default: white) and for
44254 \begin_inset space ~
44264 sets the color back to the default.
44267 \begin_layout Standard
44268 Clicking any button showing
44276 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44277 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44278 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44279 later more quickly.
44282 \begin_layout Standard
44283 Note, if you change the
44286 \begin_inset space ~
44291 font color and use the option
44294 \begin_inset space ~
44299 in the document settings under
44302 \begin_inset space ~
44307 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44314 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44321 \begin_layout Standard
44322 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44328 \begin_layout Standard
44332 \begin_inset space ~
44341 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44344 \begin_inset space ~
44347 Code after a forced page break:
44350 \begin_layout Itemize
44351 For the page color:
44352 \begin_inset Newline newline
44359 pagecolor{color name}
44362 \begin_layout Itemize
44363 For the text color:
44364 \begin_inset Newline newline
44374 \begin_layout Standard
44375 You are restricted to one of
44411 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44418 \begin_inset space ~
44424 \begin_inset Newline newline
44427 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44428 names to refer to them:
44431 \begin_layout Itemize
44437 \begin_inset Newline newline
44442 page_backgroundcolor
44445 \begin_layout Itemize
44449 \begin_inset space ~
44455 \begin_inset Newline newline
44463 \begin_layout Itemize
44467 \begin_inset space ~
44473 \begin_inset Newline newline
44481 \begin_layout Itemize
44485 \begin_inset space ~
44491 \begin_inset Newline newline
44499 \begin_layout Standard
44500 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44503 \begin_inset space ~
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44519 \begin_layout Section
44523 \begin_layout Standard
44524 Here you can adjust the
44528 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44532 as described in section
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44539 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44546 \begin_layout Section
44550 \begin_layout Standard
44551 Here you can specify if a
44552 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44555 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44557 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44563 \begin_inset Index idx
44566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44570 -packages ! biblatex
44582 \begin_inset Index idx
44585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44597 \begin_inset Index idx
44600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44602 -packages ! jurabib
44609 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44610 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44612 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44617 Sectioned bibliography
44619 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44625 \begin_inset Index idx
44628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44630 -packages ! bibtopic
44636 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44638 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44643 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44645 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44649 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44656 for the generation of the bibliography.
44657 For a further description
44658 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44662 \begin_inset space ~
44666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44668 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44675 \begin_layout Section
44679 \begin_layout Standard
44680 Here you can define the
44684 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44686 \begin_inset space ~
44690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44692 reference "sec:Index"
44699 \begin_layout Section
44703 \begin_layout Standard
44704 The PDF properties are explained in section
44705 \begin_inset space ~
44709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44711 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44718 \begin_layout Section
44722 \begin_layout Standard
44723 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44724 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44730 \begin_inset Index idx
44733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44735 -packages ! amsmath
44745 \begin_inset Index idx
44748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44750 -packages ! amssymb
44760 \begin_inset Index idx
44763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44775 \begin_inset Index idx
44778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44790 \begin_inset Index idx
44793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44795 -packages ! mathdots
44805 \begin_inset Index idx
44808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 -packages ! mathtools
44820 \begin_inset Index idx
44823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44835 \begin_inset Index idx
44838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44840 -packages ! stackrel
44850 \begin_inset Index idx
44853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 -packages ! stmaryrd
44865 \begin_inset Index idx
44868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44870 -packages ! undertilde
44875 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44878 \begin_layout Description
44879 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44880 -errors in formulas,
44881 ensure that you have this enabled.
44884 \begin_layout Description
44885 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44886 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44887 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44891 \begin_layout Description
44892 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44895 \begin_inset space ~
44907 \begin_layout Description
44908 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44911 \begin_inset space ~
44923 \begin_layout Description
44924 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44935 \begin_layout Description
44936 mathtools is used for the math commands
44972 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44979 \begin_layout Description
44980 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44982 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44991 \begin_layout Description
44992 stackrel is used for the math command
45009 \begin_layout Description
45010 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45013 \begin_layout Description
45014 undertilde is used for the math command
45022 Accents for one Character
45031 \begin_layout Section
45035 \begin_layout Standard
45036 The float placement options are described in the section
45039 \begin_inset space ~
45047 \begin_inset space ~
45055 \begin_layout Section
45059 \begin_layout Standard
45060 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45062 Program Code Listings
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45075 \begin_layout Section
45079 \begin_layout Standard
45080 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45088 set to be used and set the
45093 The itemize environment is described in section
45094 \begin_inset space ~
45098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45100 reference "sec:Itemize"
45107 \begin_layout Standard
45108 You can furthermore specify a
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45116 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45117 command of the desired character.
45118 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45125 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45131 \begin_inset space \space{}
45135 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45145 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45146 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45149 \begin_layout Standard
45150 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45158 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45159 -packages in the preamble (menu
45162 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45163 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45166 \begin_inset space ~
45172 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45176 usepackage{textcomp}
45179 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45183 usepackage{amssymb}
45193 \begin_layout Section
45197 \begin_layout Standard
45198 Branches are described in section
45199 \begin_inset space ~
45203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45205 reference "sec:Branches"
45212 \begin_layout Section
45214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45216 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45223 \begin_layout Standard
45224 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45227 \begin_layout Description
45229 \begin_inset space ~
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45236 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45256 View Master Document
45257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45264 Update Master Document
45265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45272 menu or the toolbar.
45273 The default is set in
45275 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45276 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45278 \begin_inset space ~
45281 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45285 \begin_inset space ~
45289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45291 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45298 \begin_layout Description
45300 \begin_inset space ~
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45307 Output settings for the menu
45309 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45317 For a detailed description see section
45319 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45332 \begin_layout Description
45334 \begin_inset space ~
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45341 Options offers settings for the export format
45349 \begin_inset space ~
45354 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45355 \begin_inset space ~
45358 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45362 \begin_inset space ~
45367 settings are described in detail in section
45369 Math Output in XHTML
45374 \begin_inset space ~
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45387 \begin_inset space ~
45392 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45395 \begin_layout Description
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45402 Save transient properties
45404 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45405 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45406 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45410 \begin_layout Itemize
45411 the activation of change tracking
45414 \begin_layout Itemize
45415 the output of tracked changes
45418 \begin_layout Itemize
45419 the recording of the document directory path.
45422 \begin_layout Standard
45423 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45424 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45428 \begin_layout Section
45436 \begin_layout Standard
45437 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45439 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45441 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45443 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45447 \begin_layout Standard
45448 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45449 -syntax is given in section
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45456 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45463 \begin_layout Chapter
45469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45471 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45476 \begin_inset Index idx
45479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45488 \begin_layout Standard
45489 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45495 It has the following submenus.
45498 \begin_layout Section
45502 \begin_layout Subsection
45506 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45507 User Interface File
45508 \begin_inset Index idx
45511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45512 Customization ! of toolbars
45518 \begin_inset Index idx
45521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 Customization ! of menus
45530 \begin_layout Standard
45531 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45532 interface (ui) file.
45533 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45541 \begin_layout Description
45546 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45549 \begin_layout Description
45556 the menu entries in popup context menus
45559 \begin_layout Description
45564 specifies the toolbar buttons
45567 \begin_layout Standard
45568 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45569 and edit the entries.
45572 \begin_layout Standard
45573 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45585 entries must be finished with an explicit
45610 and in the case of the
45611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45623 The syntax for the entries is:
45626 \begin_layout Standard
45627 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45656 \begin_layout Standard
45658 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45661 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45662 -functions are listed in the menu
45664 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45666 \begin_inset space ~
45674 \begin_layout Standard
45675 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45681 \begin_layout Standard
45682 For example, assuming you use the menu
45684 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45687 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45691 \begin_layout Standard
45692 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45716 \begin_layout Standard
45718 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45733 to have the sixth bookmark.
45736 \begin_layout Standard
45740 \begin_inset space ~
45745 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45746 's toolbar buttons.
45747 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45748 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45751 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45758 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45762 \begin_layout Standard
45765 Enable tool tips in main work area
45767 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45775 \begin_layout Standard
45780 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45781 should display in the menu
45783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45785 \begin_inset space ~
45793 \begin_layout Subsection
45797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45801 \begin_layout Standard
45804 Restore window layouts and geometries
45807 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45808 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45812 \begin_layout Standard
45815 Restore cursor positions
45817 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45821 \begin_layout Standard
45824 Load opened files from last session
45826 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45830 \begin_layout Standard
45833 Clear all session information
45835 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45836 sessions (cursor positions, names
45837 of last opened documents, etc.).
45840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45844 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45849 \begin_inset Index idx
45852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45861 \begin_layout Standard
45864 Backup original documents when saving
45866 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45867 it was saved the last time.
45868 It is stored in the
45871 \begin_inset space ~
45877 \begin_inset space ~
45881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45883 reference "sec:Paths"
45887 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45890 \begin_inset space ~
45896 The backup file has the file extension
45897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45911 \begin_layout Standard
45914 Backup documents, every
45916 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45919 \begin_layout Standard
45922 Save documents compressed by default
45924 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45925 \begin_inset space ~
45929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45931 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45936 This applies to newly created documents only.
45937 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45940 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45941 Windows & work area
45944 \begin_layout Standard
45947 Open documents in tabs
45949 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45953 \begin_layout Standard
45958 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45971 reference "sec:Paths"
45975 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45982 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45983 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45984 of \SpecialChar LyX
45986 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45987 instance is created for each file.
45990 \begin_layout Standard
45993 Single close-tab button
45995 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46005 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46006 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46008 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
46009 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
46015 \begin_layout Standard
46016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46024 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46025 before the change takes effect.
46033 \begin_layout Standard
46038 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46040 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46042 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46046 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46047 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46048 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46051 \begin_layout Subsection
46053 \begin_inset Index idx
46056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46065 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46077 \begin_layout Standard
46078 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46086 This section only deals with the fonts
46090 the \SpecialChar LyX
46092 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46096 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46107 \begin_layout Standard
46108 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46125 (depends on the system) as its
46128 \begin_inset space ~
46144 \begin_layout Standard
46145 You can change the font size with the
46152 \begin_layout Standard
46157 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46162 points have the size of 1
46163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46167 \begin_inset space ~
46171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46173 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46178 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46183 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46184 \begin_inset space ~
46188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46190 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46197 \begin_layout Standard
46200 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46202 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46203 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46204 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46205 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46206 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46208 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46209 \begin_inset space ~
46215 \begin_layout Subsection
46217 \begin_inset Index idx
46220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46221 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46228 \begin_inset Index idx
46231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46240 \begin_layout Standard
46241 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46242 by choosing an item in the
46243 list and selecting the
46250 \begin_layout Standard
46251 By checking the option
46255 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46258 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46259 \begin_inset space ~
46263 \begin_inset space ~
46268 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46271 \begin_layout Subsection
46273 \begin_inset Index idx
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46285 \begin_layout Standard
46286 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46290 \begin_layout Standard
46295 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46296 This feature is described in section
46297 \begin_inset space ~
46301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46303 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46310 \begin_layout Standard
46311 Checking the option
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46318 \begin_inset space ~
46322 \begin_inset space ~
46327 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46330 \begin_layout Section
46332 \begin_inset Index idx
46335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46344 \begin_layout Subsection
46348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46352 \begin_layout Standard
46355 Cursor follows scrollbar
46357 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46361 \begin_layout Standard
46362 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46363 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46364 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46367 \begin_layout Standard
46370 Scroll below end of document
46372 is self-explanatory.
46375 \begin_layout Standard
46376 In \SpecialChar LyX
46377 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46384 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46386 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46387 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46390 \begin_layout Standard
46393 Sort environments alphabetically
46395 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46398 \begin_layout Standard
46401 Group environments by their category
46403 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46406 \begin_layout Standard
46411 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46426 \begin_layout Standard
46427 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46432 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46433 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46437 \begin_layout Subsection
46439 \begin_inset Index idx
46442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46449 \begin_inset Index idx
46452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46453 Settings ! Shortcuts
46461 \begin_layout Standard
46466 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46468 Several binding files are available, among them:
46471 \begin_layout Description
46472 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46475 \begin_layout Description
46476 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46488 \begin_layout Description
46489 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46500 \begin_layout Standard
46501 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46506 , and binding files for special languages.
46507 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46512 \begin_inset space \space{}
46516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46524 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46525 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46526 will try to use the appropriate binding
46530 \begin_layout Standard
46531 Some binding files, like
46535 , only have a limited scope.
46536 When looking at the end of the file
46540 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46543 \begin_layout Standard
46547 \begin_inset space ~
46551 \begin_inset space ~
46556 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46557 in the selected key binding file.
46560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46564 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46569 \begin_inset Index idx
46572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 Key Bindings ! Editing
46581 \begin_layout Standard
46582 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46583 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46584 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46585 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46588 Show key-bindings containing
46591 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46592 Insert there for example as keyword
46593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46600 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46601 functions that contain
46602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46610 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46611 All \SpecialChar LyX
46612 functions are also listed in the file
46617 that you will find in the
46624 \begin_layout Standard
46625 For example, to add the shortcut
46633 , select the function and press the
46638 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46639 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46642 \begin_layout Standard
46643 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46644 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46646 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46647 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46649 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46654 \begin_layout Standard
46655 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46658 \begin_layout Standard
46659 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46661 The syntax of the entries is:
46664 \begin_layout Standard
46670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46689 \begin_layout Subsection
46691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46693 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46698 \begin_inset Index idx
46701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46708 \begin_inset Index idx
46711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46712 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46720 \begin_layout Standard
46721 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46722 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46723 provides keyboard maps.
46724 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46725 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46728 \begin_inset space ~
46732 \begin_inset space ~
46737 and select the keyboard map file named
46744 \begin_layout Standard
46753 keyboard map and, if you use the
46757 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46760 arg "keymap-primary"
46766 arg "keymap-secondary"
46769 respectively or toggle between them with
46772 arg "keymap-toggle"
46778 \begin_layout Standard
46779 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46787 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46796 \begin_layout Standard
46797 You can also specify the mouse
46799 Wheel scrolling speed
46802 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46806 Middle mouse button pasting
46808 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46809 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46812 \begin_layout Standard
46820 \begin_inset space ~
46824 \begin_inset space ~
46829 you can select a key for zooming.
46830 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46833 \begin_layout Subsection
46837 \begin_layout Standard
46838 Input completion is described in section
46839 \begin_inset space ~
46843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46845 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46852 \begin_layout Section
46854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46861 \begin_inset Index idx
46864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46871 \begin_inset Index idx
46874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46883 \begin_layout Standard
46884 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46885 are normally determined during
46887 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46890 \begin_layout Description
46892 \begin_inset space ~
46895 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46896 's working directory.
46897 It is the default when you
46908 \begin_inset space ~
46916 \begin_layout Description
46918 \begin_inset space ~
46921 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46923 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46925 \begin_inset space ~
46929 \begin_inset space ~
46937 \begin_layout Description
46939 \begin_inset space ~
46942 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46948 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46952 \begin_inset Newline newline
46956 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46968 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46969 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46977 \begin_layout Description
46979 \begin_inset space ~
46983 \begin_inset Index idx
46986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46992 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46993 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46994 \begin_inset space ~
46998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47000 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47008 will be used to save the backups.
47009 \begin_inset Newline newline
47012 Backup files have the ending
47013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47023 \begin_layout Description
47025 \begin_inset space ~
47028 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47029 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47031 \begin_inset Newline newline
47038 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47044 You can edit this file with the program
47053 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47054 in its preferences under
47057 \begin_inset space ~
47063 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47068 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47070 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47071 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47077 and \SpecialChar LyX
47078 need to be running the same time.
47079 \begin_inset Newline newline
47082 The pipe is also used for the
47086 feature, see section
47087 \begin_inset space ~
47091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47093 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47098 \begin_inset Newline newline
47101 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47102 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47103 \begin_inset Newline newline
47119 \begin_layout Description
47121 \begin_inset space ~
47124 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47127 \begin_layout Description
47129 \begin_inset space ~
47132 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47133 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47134 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47137 \begin_layout Description
47139 \begin_inset space ~
47142 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47148 You only need to specify it if you are using
47152 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47154 For \SpecialChar LyX
47159 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47163 \begin_layout Description
47165 \begin_inset space ~
47168 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47169 When \SpecialChar LyX
47170 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47171 to find it on the system.
47172 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47174 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47183 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47184 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47187 \begin_layout Description
47189 \begin_inset space ~
47192 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47193 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47194 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47195 code or in the document
47197 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47199 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47200 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47201 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47202 scanned for the input files.
47203 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47204 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47206 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47207 compilation may fail for some documents.
47210 \begin_layout Section
47214 \begin_layout Standard
47215 Here you can insert your
47224 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47226 \begin_inset space ~
47230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47232 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47236 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47239 \begin_layout Section
47241 \begin_inset Index idx
47244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47245 Language ! Settings
47251 \begin_inset Index idx
47254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47255 Settings ! Language
47263 \begin_layout Subsection
47265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47267 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47274 \begin_layout Description
47276 \begin_inset space ~
47280 \begin_inset space ~
47283 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47285 You can find its actual translation status here:
47286 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47288 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47295 \begin_layout Description
47297 \begin_inset space ~
47300 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47301 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47302 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47303 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47320 The most widespread language package is
47325 \begin_inset Index idx
47328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47335 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47337 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47338 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47339 come with the alternative
47345 \begin_inset Index idx
47348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47350 -packages ! polyglossia
47355 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47356 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47362 The available selections are described in section
47363 \begin_inset space ~
47367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47369 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47376 \begin_layout Description
47378 \begin_inset space ~
47381 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47382 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47383 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47384 An example is the start command
47390 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47392 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47396 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47411 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47416 \begin_layout Description
47418 \begin_inset space ~
47426 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47427 command toggles the package on and off.
47430 \begin_layout Description
47432 \begin_inset space ~
47436 \begin_inset space ~
47439 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47443 \begin_layout Description
47445 \begin_inset space ~
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47452 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47456 \begin_layout Description
47458 \begin_inset space ~
47462 \begin_inset space ~
47465 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47466 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47467 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47469 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47476 \begin_layout Description
47478 \begin_inset space ~
47481 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47483 When this option is not set, the
47486 \begin_inset space ~
47491 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47493 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47496 \begin_inset space ~
47504 \begin_layout Description
47506 \begin_inset space ~
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47518 When it is not set, the
47521 \begin_inset space ~
47526 is set to the end of the document.
47529 \begin_layout Description
47531 \begin_inset space ~
47535 \begin_inset space ~
47538 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47539 language will be underlined in blue.
47542 \begin_layout Description
47544 \begin_inset space ~
47548 \begin_inset space ~
47551 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47552 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47555 \begin_layout Description
47557 \begin_inset space ~
47560 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47561 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47562 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47563 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47566 \begin_layout Subsection
47570 \begin_layout Standard
47571 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47572 \begin_inset space ~
47576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47578 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47585 \begin_layout Section
47589 \begin_layout Subsection
47591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47593 name "subsec:General-output"
47600 \begin_layout Description
47602 \begin_inset space ~
47605 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47607 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47609 \begin_inset space ~
47615 For a detailed description see section
47617 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47622 \begin_inset space ~
47630 \begin_layout Description
47632 \begin_inset space ~
47635 Options Options for the program
47639 that is used for the export format
47644 \begin_inset space ~
47648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47650 reference "subsec:Export"
47655 Possible options are listed in the
47660 \begin_inset Newline newline
47664 \begin_inset Flex URL
47667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47669 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47679 \begin_layout Description
47681 \begin_inset space ~
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47688 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47691 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47692 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47694 \begin_inset space ~
47700 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47703 \begin_layout Description
47705 \begin_inset space ~
47709 \begin_inset Index idx
47712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47719 \begin_inset Index idx
47722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47723 Settings ! Date format
47728 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47729 \begin_inset Newline newline
47733 \begin_inset Flex URL
47736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47738 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47744 \begin_inset Newline newline
47747 For example the format
47748 \begin_inset Newline newline
47752 \begin_inset Newline newline
47755 prints the date as day/month/year.
47758 \begin_layout Description
47760 \begin_inset space ~
47764 \begin_inset space ~
47767 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47768 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47771 \begin_layout Subsection
47777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47779 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47784 \begin_inset Index idx
47787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47788 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47797 \begin_layout Description
47799 \begin_inset space ~
47807 \begin_inset space ~
47811 \begin_inset space ~
47814 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47819 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47840 are used for Cyrillic.
47841 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47854 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47856 sets up in the background.
47857 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47860 \begin_layout Description
47862 \begin_inset space ~
47866 \begin_inset space ~
47870 \begin_inset space ~
47874 \begin_inset space ~
47877 options They only have an effect when the program
47881 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47884 \begin_layout Standard
47885 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47886 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47887 manuals of the applications.
47890 \begin_layout Description
47892 \begin_inset space ~
47895 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47896 \begin_inset space ~
47900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47902 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47909 \begin_layout Description
47911 \begin_inset space ~
47914 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47915 \begin_inset space ~
47919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47921 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47928 \begin_layout Description
47930 \begin_inset space ~
47933 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47934 \begin_inset space ~
47938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47940 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47947 \begin_layout Description
47953 \begin_inset space ~
47956 command Command for the program
47958 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47961 that is described in the section
47963 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47968 Additional Features
47973 \begin_layout Standard
47974 There are additionally the following options:
47977 \begin_layout Description
47979 \begin_inset space ~
47983 \begin_inset space ~
47987 \begin_inset space ~
47991 \begin_inset space ~
47996 \begin_inset space ~
47999 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48017 to separate folders.
48018 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48020 \begin_inset Index idx
48023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48030 \begin_inset Index idx
48033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48042 \begin_layout Description
48044 \begin_inset space ~
48048 \begin_inset space ~
48052 \begin_inset space ~
48056 \begin_inset space ~
48060 \begin_inset space ~
48064 \begin_inset space ~
48067 changes Removes all manually set
48073 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48074 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48076 \begin_inset space ~
48081 dialog when changing the document class.
48084 \begin_layout Section
48086 \begin_inset space ~
48090 \begin_inset Index idx
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48102 \begin_layout Subsection
48104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48106 name "subsec:Converters"
48111 \begin_inset Index idx
48114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48123 \begin_layout Standard
48124 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48125 from one format to another.
48126 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48127 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48134 \begin_inset space ~
48139 field and press the
48144 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48148 \begin_inset space ~
48153 drop-down list, modify the
48157 field and press the
48164 \begin_layout Standard
48167 Converter File Cache
48173 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48175 Maximum Age (in days
48178 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48179 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48182 \begin_layout Standard
48183 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48184 definition, is described in the section
48195 \begin_layout Subsection
48197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48199 name "sec:File-Formats"
48204 \begin_inset Index idx
48207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48214 \begin_inset Index idx
48217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48226 \begin_layout Standard
48227 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48237 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48240 \begin_layout Standard
48241 You can also define the
48243 Default output format
48245 that is used when you use
48247 View, Update, View Master Document
48251 Update Master Document
48257 menu or the toolbar.
48260 \begin_layout Standard
48261 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48272 \begin_layout Standard
48273 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48275 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48276 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48277 This is done by specifying a
48282 More about this is described in the section
48293 \begin_layout Chapter
48294 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48296 \begin_inset Index idx
48299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48308 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48315 \begin_layout Standard
48317 \begin_inset space ~
48321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48323 reference "tab:Units"
48327 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48328 and used in this documentation.
48331 \begin_layout Standard
48332 \begin_inset Float table
48338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48339 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48357 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48365 \begin_inset Tabular
48366 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48367 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48369 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48370 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48576 scaled point (65536
48577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48655 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48728 % of original image width
48733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49044 \begin_layout Chapter
49046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49048 name "chap:Credits"
49055 \begin_layout Standard
49056 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49057 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49060 \begin_layout Itemize
49063 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49066 \begin_layout Itemize
49072 \begin_layout Itemize
49078 \begin_layout Itemize
49084 \begin_layout Itemize
49090 \begin_layout Itemize
49096 \begin_layout Itemize
49102 \begin_layout Itemize
49108 \begin_layout Itemize
49111 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49114 \begin_layout Itemize
49120 \begin_layout Itemize
49126 \begin_layout Itemize
49132 \begin_layout Itemize
49138 \begin_layout Itemize
49144 \begin_layout Itemize
49150 \begin_layout Itemize
49156 \begin_layout Itemize
49162 \begin_layout Itemize
49163 The \SpecialChar LyX
49165 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49174 \begin_layout Standard
49175 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49178 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49185 \begin_layout Bibliography
49186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49187 LatexCommand bibitem
49193 The \SpecialChar LyX
49195 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49198 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49203 \begin_inset Newline newline
49207 \begin_inset Flex URL
49210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49212 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49220 \begin_layout Bibliography
49221 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49222 LatexCommand bibitem
49223 key "latexcompanion"
49227 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49229 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49230 Companion Second Edition.
49233 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49236 \begin_layout Bibliography
49237 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49238 LatexCommand bibitem
49243 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49246 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49250 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49253 \begin_layout Bibliography
49254 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49255 LatexCommand bibitem
49263 : A Document Preparation System.
49266 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49269 \begin_layout Bibliography
49270 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49271 LatexCommand bibitem
49280 The \SpecialChar TeX
49284 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49287 \begin_layout Bibliography
49288 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49289 LatexCommand bibitem
49294 The \SpecialChar TeX
49296 \begin_inset Newline newline
49300 \begin_inset Flex URL
49303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49305 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49313 \begin_layout Bibliography
49314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49315 LatexCommand bibitem
49320 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49322 \begin_inset Newline newline
49326 \begin_inset Flex URL
49329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49331 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49339 \begin_layout Bibliography
49340 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49341 LatexCommand bibitem
49347 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49349 name "Documentation"
49350 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49356 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49360 \begin_inset Newline newline
49364 \begin_inset Flex URL
49367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49369 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49377 \begin_layout Bibliography
49378 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49379 LatexCommand bibitem
49385 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49387 name "Documentation"
49388 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49392 how to use the program
49394 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49398 \begin_inset Newline newline
49402 \begin_inset Flex URL
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49407 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49413 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884806
49417 \begin_layout Bibliography
49419 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884882
49420 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49421 LatexCommand bibitem
49427 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49430 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49439 \begin_inset Newline newline
49443 \begin_inset Flex URL
49446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49448 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884888
49450 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49460 \begin_layout Bibliography
49461 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49462 LatexCommand bibitem
49468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49470 name "Documentation"
49471 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49480 \begin_inset Newline newline
49484 \begin_inset Flex URL
49487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49489 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49497 \begin_layout Bibliography
49498 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49499 LatexCommand bibitem
49500 key "makeindex-man"
49505 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49508 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49517 \begin_inset Newline newline
49521 \begin_inset Flex URL
49524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49526 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49534 \begin_layout Bibliography
49535 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49536 LatexCommand bibitem
49542 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49544 name "Documentation"
49545 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49554 \begin_inset Newline newline
49558 \begin_inset Flex URL
49561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49563 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49571 \begin_layout Bibliography
49572 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49573 LatexCommand bibitem
49579 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49581 name "Documentation"
49582 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49586 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49588 \begin_inset Newline newline
49592 \begin_inset Flex URL
49595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49597 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49605 \begin_layout Bibliography
49606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49607 LatexCommand bibitem
49613 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49615 name "Documentation"
49616 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49620 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49626 \begin_inset Index idx
49629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49631 -packages ! caption
49637 \begin_inset Newline newline
49641 \begin_inset Flex URL
49644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49646 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49654 \begin_layout Bibliography
49655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49656 LatexCommand bibitem
49662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49664 name "Documentation"
49665 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49669 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49675 \begin_inset Index idx
49678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49680 -packages ! enumitem
49686 \begin_inset Newline newline
49690 \begin_inset Flex URL
49693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49695 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49703 \begin_layout Bibliography
49704 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49705 LatexCommand bibitem
49711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49713 name "Documentation"
49714 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49718 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49724 \begin_inset Index idx
49727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49729 -packages ! fancyhdr
49735 \begin_inset Newline newline
49739 \begin_inset Flex URL
49742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49744 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49752 \begin_layout Bibliography
49753 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49754 LatexCommand bibitem
49760 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49762 name "Documentation"
49763 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49767 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49773 \begin_inset Index idx
49776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49778 -packages ! hyperref
49784 \begin_inset Newline newline
49788 \begin_inset Flex URL
49791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49793 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49801 \begin_layout Bibliography
49802 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49803 LatexCommand bibitem
49809 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49811 name "Documentation"
49812 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49816 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49822 \begin_inset Index idx
49825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49827 -packages ! nomencl
49833 \begin_inset Newline newline
49837 \begin_inset Flex URL
49840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49842 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49850 \begin_layout Bibliography
49851 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49852 LatexCommand bibitem
49858 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49860 name "Documentation"
49861 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49865 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49871 \begin_inset Index idx
49874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49876 -packages ! prettyref
49882 \begin_inset Newline newline
49886 \begin_inset Flex URL
49889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49891 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49899 \begin_layout Bibliography
49900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49901 LatexCommand bibitem
49907 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49909 name "Documentation"
49910 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49914 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49920 \begin_inset Index idx
49923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49925 -packages ! refstyle
49931 \begin_inset Newline newline
49935 \begin_inset Flex URL
49938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49940 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49948 \begin_layout Bibliography
49949 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49950 LatexCommand bibitem
49956 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49959 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49963 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49965 \begin_inset Newline newline
49969 \begin_inset Flex URL
49972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49974 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49982 \begin_layout Bibliography
49983 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49984 LatexCommand bibitem
49990 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49993 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49997 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49999 \begin_inset Newline newline
50003 \begin_inset Flex URL
50006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50008 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50016 \begin_layout Bibliography
50017 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50018 LatexCommand bibitem
50024 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50027 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50031 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50032 for Cyrillic languages:
50033 \begin_inset Newline newline
50037 \begin_inset Flex URL
50040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50042 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50050 \begin_layout Bibliography
50051 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50052 LatexCommand bibitem
50058 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50061 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50065 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50067 \begin_inset Newline newline
50071 \begin_inset Flex URL
50074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50076 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50084 \begin_layout Bibliography
50085 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50086 LatexCommand bibitem
50092 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50095 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50099 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50101 \begin_inset Newline newline
50105 \begin_inset Flex URL
50108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50110 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50118 \begin_layout Bibliography
50119 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50120 LatexCommand bibitem
50126 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50129 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50133 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50135 \begin_inset Newline newline
50139 \begin_inset Flex URL
50142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50144 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50152 \begin_layout Bibliography
50153 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50154 LatexCommand bibitem
50160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50163 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50167 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50169 \begin_inset Newline newline
50173 \begin_inset Flex URL
50176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50178 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50186 \begin_layout Bibliography
50187 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50188 LatexCommand bibitem
50194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50197 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50201 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50203 \begin_inset Newline newline
50207 \begin_inset Flex URL
50210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50212 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50220 \begin_layout Bibliography
50221 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50222 LatexCommand bibitem
50228 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50231 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50235 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50237 \begin_inset Newline newline
50241 \begin_inset Flex URL
50244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50246 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50254 \begin_layout Bibliography
50255 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50256 LatexCommand bibitem
50262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50265 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50269 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50271 \begin_inset Newline newline
50275 \begin_inset Flex URL
50278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50280 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50288 \begin_layout Bibliography
50289 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50290 LatexCommand bibitem
50296 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50299 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50303 about new features in
50309 \begin_inset Newline newline
50313 \begin_inset Flex URL
50316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50318 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50326 \begin_layout Standard
50327 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50361 \begin_inset Note Note
50364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50371 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50372 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50373 bibliography is the second one:
50381 \begin_layout Standard
50382 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50383 LatexCommand bibtex
50384 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50385 options "biblio/alphadin"
50392 \begin_layout Standard
50393 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50397 \begin_layout Standard
50398 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50399 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50405 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50406 LatexCommand printindex